Siemens 611-D manual

SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 61 1 - D Installation Guide 09.2001 Edition Installation Instructions Service Documentation[...]

[...]

SINUMERIK 840C SIMODRIVE 611-D Installation Instructions Installation Guide SINUMERIK 840C / CE Control Standard / Export Version SIMODRIVE 611-D Drive Software Version Software Version 1.x 2.x 3.x 1.x 4.x 2.x 5.x 3.x 6.x 4.x 09.2001 Edition[...]

SINUMERIK ® documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the ”Remarks” column. Status code in ”Remarks” column : A . . . New documentation. B . . . Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C . . . Revised edition with new status. If factu[...]

Preliminary Remarks Notes for the reader This manual is intended for manufacturers of machine tools who use SINUMERIK 840C. The "Installation Instructions" discuss the installation and start-up procedures, from installation of the system through the testing of the most important functions. The SINUMERIK 840C Installation Guide is divided [...]

Safety notes DANGER This warning notice means that loss of life, severe personal injury or substantial material damage will result if the appropriate precautions are not taken. WARNING This warning notice means that loss of life, severe personal injury or substantial material damage can result if the appropriate precautions are not taken. CAUTION T[...]

Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1 General Reset and Standard Start-up 2 PLC Installation 3 Machine Data Dialog (MDD - as from SW 3) 5 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) 9 Axis and Spindle Installation 10 Data Bac[...]

Contents 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 1.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 1.2 Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1 1.2.1 Information on module handling . . . . . [...]

4 MMC Area Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 4.1 General notes / Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 4.1.1 Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1 4.1.2 Simplified switchover between languages (as from[...]

5.3 PLC configuration and PLC machine data (as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . 5–18 5.3.1 PLC configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–18 5.3.2 PLC machine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–20 5.4 Drive configuration and drive machine data (as from SW 3) [...]

6.6.6 Channel-specific MD bits 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–155 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–158 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–180 6.8 MDs for multi-channel display . . . . . . . . [...]

9.3 Function generator (axis and spindle - as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . . . . 9–23 9.3.1 Function generator (axis and spindle) - signal parameters (as from SW 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–24 9.3.2 Additional information (notes) on measurement and signal parameters (as from SW 3) . . . . . . .[...]

10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–49 10.5.1 Open-loop control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–51 10.5.2 Oscillation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–54 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through[...]

12.6 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . 12–18 12.6.1 Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–18 12.6.2 Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–19 12.6.3 The transformation data set . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

12.10 FIFO/predecoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–71 12.10.1 Rapid block change using FIFO function (up to SW 2 only) . . . . . . . . 12–71 12.10.2 Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–73 12.10.2.1 Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

12.15 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) . . . . . . . 12–116 12.15.1 Corresponding data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–116 12.15.2 Feed axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–116 12.15.3 Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm proc[...]

12.18.13 Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–156 12.18.13.1 Brief start-up of a GI grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–156 12.18.13.2 Full start-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–157 Set position cont[...]

12.20.4.4 DC link undervoltage monitoring in 611D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–217 12.20.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit . . 12–218 12.20.5.1 DC link buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–218 12.20.5.2 Monitoring for generator minimum speed limi[...]

12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–269 12.27 Parameter set switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–270 12.27.1 Parameter set switchover (up to SW 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–270 Axis parameter sets (NCK / SERVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–324 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–329 12.32.15.1 Additive protection zone adjustment via setting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12–329 12.32.15.2 Collision monitoring without reduction z[...]

11.92 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.1 Prerequisites 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.1 Prerequisites The following prerequisites must be fulfilled prior to initial start-up: • Electrical and mechanical installation of the machine must have been completed and the axes prepared for operation. The following points must be confirmed [...]

1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 11.92 1.2.1 Information on module handling 1.2.1 Information on module handling • Synthetic or rubber soling, and in particular flooring and carpeting, may produce static charges of several kilovolts in human beings. Integrated circuits are sensitive to this kind of high voltage discharge. • Electrostatic c[...]

06.93 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.2.1 Information on module handling Additional instructions: • Do not open the special packaging unnecessarily. • Do not bring into contact with synthetic materials (possibility of static charging). • Disconnect the power supply prior to insertion and removal. 1.2.2 Grounding system Proper groundin[...]

1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 06.93 1.2.5 Cables 1.2.5 Cables Check all cables in accordance with the cable and equipment overview (refer to Interface Description, Part 2). This applies particularly to cables made up by the customer. A random check should be made on at least one connector. Particular attention should be paid to elastomeric [...]

06.93 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.2.10 Jumpering 1.2.10 Jumpering The jumper configurations on the modules required at the time of installation and start-up is discussed in Part 2 of the Interface Description. 1.2.11 Position control, input and measuring system resolution In SINUMERIK, position control resolution and input resolution ca[...]

1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 10.94 1.3 Standard / Export version 1.3 Standard/Export version Export regulations Due to the fact that the German export list requires approval for certain control functions, two versions of the SINUMERIK 840C can be configured. The Standard Version (840C) is allowed to include the whole scope of functions of [...]

03.95 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.4 Installation Checklist 840C 1.4 Installation Checklist 840C F-No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation sequence Section 1 of the Installation Guide, Interface Description Part 2, and the information presented in the Instruction Manual must be carefully observed! Copy the installation[...]

1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 03.95 1.4 Installation Checklist 840C 5. Standard installation completed and customer specific machine data entered? Yes No Yes No 6. PLC program entered and tested (safety functions)? 7. Position control loops of axes installed and the following checked: Axis speeds / tachogenerator compensation / multigain / [...]

10.94 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up 1.5 Voltage and functional tests 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up NC area The checksum of the system program memory is generated whenever the control is switched on (Power On routines) and during cyclic operation. The control flags discrepancies between reference and[...]

1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 03.95 1.5.1 Self-test and system start-up File system check (SOFTWARE 4.4 and higher) Messages during the file system check: The previous message Checking file system COMPLETE is replaced by the following: • During the file system check: Verifying file system: Pass 1 COMPLETE Verifying file system: Pass 2 COM[...]

10.94 1 Prerequisites and Visual Inspection 1.6 Loading data into the NCK on starting up the control (as from SW 2) 1.6 Loading data into the NCK on starting up the control (as from SW 2) After the control has been switched on, data are transmitted from the hard disk of the MMC into the memory of the NCK-CPU in 3 phases: Phase 1: The system program[...]

 Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 2-1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up As from software version 3, machine data dialog is used for the standard start-up. For further details, refer to Machine Data Dialog (MDD) Section. 2.1 First installation and start-up of control (as from SW 3) Hardware The central[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.2 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (as from SW 3) Default values can be used for data in general reset mode during initial installation or after a loss of data caused by , for example, removal of a module, hardware defect of a module or empty b[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.3 Select general reset mode (as from SW 3) ST ART NC-ON Communication to NCK Ye s No General reset mode display Ye s No – Start-up switch on CSB in position “ Start-up ” (1) – NC ON/OFF Start-up softkey Operating area DIAGNOSIS Password entry possible[...]

FORCEDBOOT NCK-PLC PLC GEN. RESET FORMA T NCK AWS 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.4 General reset (as from SW 3) Fig. 2.1 The DIAGNOSIS, ST ART -UP and GENERAL RESET MODE softkeys are used for selecting the GENERAL RESET MODE basic display . Functions in GENERAL RESET MODE Required only for[...]

DRIVE GEN. RESET SA VE PLC END GENERL RESET MODE 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The configuration file for digital drives is deleted on the hard disk. This function has no effect on analog drives. Caution! Pressing the DRIVE GEN. RESET softkey deletes the con- tents of the BOOT FILE in the s[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.5 Memory configuration (as from SW 3) Standard values for DRAM 1 MB Part prog. 704 kB Part prog. 512 kB UMS 256 kB IKA 16 000 points 256 kB UMS 64 kB IKA 4 000 points 240 kB Block buffer 0 kB Meas. value mem. 0 kB FDD/MSD 704 kB Part prog. 256 kB UMS 64 kB IK[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Setting ranges for SRAM Default values Setting ranges T ool of fsets 32 kB 0 to 1 638 tools 0 to 64 kB R parameters 19 kB Channel: 0 to 700 parameters Central: 700 to 9 999 parameters 0 to 64 kB Free 13 kB 64 kB are available for tool offsets and R parameters. [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-8 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.6 Loading machine data (as from SW 3) Note Loading the machine data function takes several seconds and is accompanied by the flashing message “W ait”. Selection The following softkeys must be pressed: Diagnosis, Startup, Machine data, File functions: Fig.[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-9 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) error messages that occur during the Load from disk function. On ending general reset mode, load the drive data (under file functions drive configuration) or the complete file (under file functions machine configuration) again. Info key Y ou can obtain a summar[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-10 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.7 Deselect general reset mode General reset mode Start-up end softkey 1) S-U switch on CSB set to Start- up position Ye s No S-U switch on CSB set to 0 Ye s No NORMAL MODE S-U switch on CSB set to 0 and power on Password is deleted PLC is restarted Power-on [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-1 1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.8 Standard installation short version (up to SW 2) As from software version 3, machine data dialog is used for standard installation and start-up. See Machine Data Dialog Section (MDD). Operation The following sequence must be followed for standard SINUMERI[...]

LOCK P ASSWORD 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-12 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) When the softkeys, DIAGNOSIS, NC DIAGNOSIS, NC ST ART -UP and ENTER P ASSWORD have been pressed, the following display appears: 16:38 JOG PROGRAM RESET M. No. :1 Chann :1 NC alarms NC MA. DA T PLC MA. DA T . CYCLE MA. DA T . ENTER P ASSWORD LOCK[...]

DEL./LOAD MACH. DA T A DELETE NC-MD LOAD NC-MD T VERSION LOAD NC-MD M VERSION LOAD DELETE PLC-MD LOAD PLC-MD 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-13 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.9 General reset (up to SW 2) 16:38 JOG PROGRAM RESET Installation mode general reset Del/load MD Initial memory Initial clear PLC Display NC alarms E[...]

DELETE CYCLES MD INITIAL. ME- MOR Y FORMA T USER DA T A FORMA T P A RT PROG. PLC GEN. RESET END ST ART -UP 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-14 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) “ DELETE CYCLES-MD ” : The cycle setting data and MIB parameters are deleted and formatted. The MIB parameters are the machine input buffers for the [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-15 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.10 Standard installation and start-up as flowchart (up to SW 2 only) ST ART V oltage test Functional test NC-MD PLC-MD Axis start-up Spindle start-up T est run Save data to HD of MMC CPU END 2 General Reset and Standard Start-Up 2.10 Standard installation an[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-16 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.1 1 Enter PLC machine data (up to SW 2 only) ST ART Data area Parameter softkey 1) NC diagnostics softkey NC start-up softkey Press PLC MD softkey Go back with RECALL key General reset mode softkey END Correct PLC MD Entries cannot be made until password has[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-17 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.12 Enter NC machine data (up to SW 2 only) ST ART Data area Parameter softkey 1) NC diagnostics softkey NC start-up softkey Press PLC MD softkey Go back with RECALL key General reset mode softkey END Correct PLC MD Entries cannot be made until password has b[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-18 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.13 Axis installation (simplified, up to SW 2 only) ST ART JOG mode Axis traversing move- ment (direction key) Rapid traverse Perform drift compen- sation (NC-MD 272*) END Feed hold? Ye s No Alarm? Ye s No Alarm? Ye s No 1000 mm set movement=1000 mm at machin[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 2-19 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 2.14 Spindle installation (Example: one spindle, up to SW 2 only) 1 1 ST ART Enter channel no. in DB31 DL2 Actual speed = prog. speed at 100% override? Enter speed limitations in spindle SD 1st spindle available? Ye s No Spindle pulse encoder available? Ye s N[...]

 Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 3-1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3 PLC Installation 3.1 General remarks PLC CPU versions Three dif ferent PLC CPU versions can be used in the SINUMERIK 840C: S PLC CPU 135 WB2 with interface PLC and EPROM submodules for the ope- rating system and the user program (the operating system and the user pr[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) PG interface Only the following values are permissible for the PG inter- face on the PLC 135 WD: 9600 BAUD P ARITY EVEN 2 ST OP BITS The PG interface is always active. PG operation Step Activity 1 Connect cable NC-PG 2 PG 7xx Start S5-DOS 3 PG 7xx Select on-lin[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) When the PG software is selected, the 1st serial interface is disabled. It is only enabled again when the PG mode is terminated. Caution With the PG software, it is possible to select other files as well (not S5 files) to delete or copy them etc. with the func-[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Backspace Delete character not possible 1) . DEL Delete char . to the left . DEL not possi- ble 1) Shift + Shift + . DEL Delete field Shift + . DEL 0 INS Enter 0 INSERT ENTER End of input (return) Pg Up Scroll up 9 Shift + Shift + Pg Up 9 Page up Shift+ Pg Dn 3[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Restrictions S The data management function BTRIEVE is not installed. S For output on the printer via the parallel interface parallel 1 (Centronics, X122) on the MMC-CPU, LPT1 must be set in the printer parameters. S The following characters cannot be displayed[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Save/load S-RAM user pro- gram memory S-RAM user data memory Directory PLC/pro- gram file ANW_PROG Disk PLC save X151 Save/load to external in PC format e.g. PCIN 3.X PCIN 4.X PG 7xx save/load Step 5 program X1 1 1 PLC 135 WD MMC 1) Procedure PLC 135 WB2 with E[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Procedure PLC 135 WB2 with REST ART EPROM submodule and PLC 135 WD as from SW 3 Prerequisites: The PLC user program should exist either on diskette or on the hard disk, the RAM of the PLC CPU is empty . Step Description 1 The Restart EPROM submodule must be plu[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-8 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3.5 P LC diagnostics The following diagnostics displays exist: Displayed by Brief description 1 LED CPU hardware fault 2 – System initialization program 3 UST ACK detailed error coding Displays programming errors 4 PLC status Displays and changes (password) t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-9 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3.5.2 System initialization program After the self diagnostics program has been run through, the system initialization program is requested. In its first section, the data required for running the organization program are set up. This setting up includes: S Sta[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-10 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3.5.3 UST ACK, detailed error coding The operating system can detect malfunctioning of the central processor , errors in the system program or effects of incorrect programming by the user . If the interpreter comes across an error during command processing or [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-1 1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3.5.4 PLC status In the “ PLC ST A TUS ” mode, the user can read out the contents of counters and timers and read out and write input words, output words, flag words, data words and data double words. These words can only be written when a password has be[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-12 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) INPUT : Enter new value for the selected word or bit RECALL: Return to preceding display Example of operation S Reading input, output and flag words Softkey: IW , QW , FW Keys Preselect word number 14 ++ S Reading data words Softkey DB to select a DB Softkey D[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 3-13 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 3.5.5 Timeout analysis A write access to the communication or local bus is executed by the bus interface. The processor immediately receives an acknowledgement and continues. (Buffe - red access to communication/local bus). If a timeout occurs during such an a[...]

SET DELETE 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 4–1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4 MMC Area Diagnosis 4.1 General notes/overviews 4.1.1 Password A password protects data against unauthorized access. The MMC and NCK areas are password-protected. Selection of the password in the MMC area Diagnosis Diagnosis Start-up Password Passw[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.1.2 Simplified switchover between languages (as from SW 5) In the Diagnosis area it is possible to changed the language of the input screens that appear subsequently . This is done with the softkey “ Language/Sprache ” in the initial display of the Diag[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.1.3 Printing screen hardcopies The screen hardcopies are stored in a compressed TIFF or PCX format to reduce the transmission times via the RS 232 interface. The format is selected in two Bedconf entries. The formats can be interpreted with Windows tools, s[...]

Diagnosis Display by priority Display by time Messages Alarms Language/ Sprache Password PG function 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.1.4 Selection of the Diagnosis area Select the DIAGNOSIS area with this softkey in the area menu bar . The initial display that appears shows you the alarms[...]

Service display Start-up A Alarm log 1 Alarm log 2 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Fig. 4.3 Default setting: All alarms and messages are included. Default setting: All reset and power ON alarms are included. Note: Both files are configured in the CONFIG file. Fig. 4.4 Alarm log 1 4 MMC Area[...]

NC info NC service PLC service Drive MSD/ FDD Exit points Start-up A Logbook 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Display NCK software version For description see NC service in this section. The displays are used for debugging incorrect programs. The status display is used to show PLC data (e.g.[...]

Machine data Drive servo startup General reset mode PC data Options Backup T ime/date 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) For a description of the machine data dialog MDD (on SW3 and higher) see Sec- tion 5, Machine data dialog (MDD). For a description of NC-MD see Section 6, NC machine data (N[...]

NCK power ON Start-up end 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–8 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) NCK power ON without voltage failure. Features: S MD are activated. S Reference point values are lost. S PC data are not updated. T erminate the machine data dialog (MDD). 4.2 NC Service For drive optimization and error diagnosis it [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–9 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) S Parameter set conversion Selected parameter set is displayed. S Service no. See the Diagnostics Guide for the list of service nos. Service values are displayed in double size, i.e. in position control resolution unit (e.g. following error displayed 2000 wit[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–10 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.2.1 Selection of service data Data range Diagnosis Service display NC service Single axes Single spindles Further axes/ spindles Service Axes single display Axis 1 (1–8) Following error Absolute actual value Absolute setpoint value Abs. compensation val.[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4– 11 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The figure for single display is updated more frequently than the figure for several axes and spindles. Note Use the single figure for exact control. Change to the following axes with “ Page down ” key . If you enter the digit “8” and press the sear[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–12 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Selection of the The display of the service data is selected with the softkey Diagnosis, Service spindle service data displays. Selection see also Section 5.4. Y ou change over to the following axes with the “ Page down ” key . Y ou enter the digit “4?[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–13 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Explanation of display fields MSD 1st screen Drive status This display field describes the ramp-up and operating status of the digital drives. This status is generated in the SERVO during start-up and then changed accor- dingly in the display (SW 4: Drive MD[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–14 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Message ZK1 This display field contains the state of message state class 1 of cyclic status word 1 (drive MD 1 1002.0). Possible display range: off or on. Pulse enable actual This display field contains the state of enabled pulses of cyclic status word 2 (dr[...]

MSD 2nd screen 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–15 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Drive service display MSD 2nd screen Press the MSD 2nd screen softkey in the service area for drive MSD/FDD. Fig. 4.7 Explanation The drive service display MSD 2nd screen gives you an overview of the signals and statuses of the MSD drives and [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–16 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Speed setpoint This display field contains the status of speed setpoint smoothing of cyclic status smoothing actual value word 1 (drive MD 1 1002.1 1). Ramp-function This display field contains the status of ram-function generator rapid stop of cyclic genera[...]

FDD 1st screen 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–17 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Motor temperature This display field shows the current motor temperature (SW 3: drive MD 1/SW 4: drive MD 1702). Status of binary inputs This display field contains the state of the binary input (drive MD 1 1). (SW 3) Possible display range: 0[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–18 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Feed drive This display field describes the currently selected FDD drive as selected via soft- keys drive +/ –. Ramp-up phase This display field contains the control word for the ramp-up control of the 61 1D components and exists for each logical digital d[...]

FDD 2nd screen 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–19 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Active power (SW 4) This display field shows the current active power (drive MD 1 101 1). Smoothed current This display field shows the smoothed current actual value in percent actual value (drive MD 1708). Motor temperature This display field[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–20 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Parking axis setpoint This display field shows the status of parking axis of cyclic control word 1 (drive MD 1 1004.1) Possible display range: off or on T ravel to fixed stop This display field contains the status of T ravel to fixed stop of cyclic status wo[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 4–21 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4 PC data All data not documented in the following sections must not be changed. Overview WOP MASTER LIST MODULE OPERA TION LANGUAGES MESS. CONFIG. BASIC USER FUNCTION AREAS ... DIAGNOSIS BEDCONF NECOLLI POCOLLI POCOCLUT POMOCLUT NEMOCLUT BEDCONF[...]

PRESET 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–22 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Keyswitch If the keyswitch is in position 3 when the system starts up, the control takes its data from the SIEMENS branch. All user data are password protected. A case where this is necessary is, for example, after a system failure if the confi- gurat[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–23 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) ! Danger Up to SW 4: The data in the USER branch are overwritten without confirmation. As from SW5: When you press softkey PRESET you are asked whether you really want to overwrite the data in the USER branch. Example Suppose we want to copy the file CONFIG [...]

PRESET 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–24 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Press the softkey PRESET to copy the file into the USER branch (from SW 5 a configuration window is also displayed). Fig. 4.13 It does not matter which branch is selected. The PRESET softkey always copies the file selected in the SIEMENS branch. 4 MMC[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–25 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.2 Configuration file CONFIG Any files which are not documented here must not be edited. Selection: SK ... , PC data Fig. 4.14 Data format of the The configuration file is stored in ASCII format. It consists of a series of lines of configuration file up t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–26 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.2.1 Keywords Keywords are words reserved by the system. The following keywords exist: S LANGUAGE Language set for NCK and MMC S LANGUAGE1 Language set for WOP 3) S LANGUAGE2 Language set for simulation 3) S LANGUAGE3 Language set for PG function 3) S LAN[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–27 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.2.2 V alue ranges and default values Keyword V alue range Default value LANGUAGE String of max. 8 characters “DEUTSCH” BT_NAME String of max. 8 characters “SER:” PROTLEN1 1 – 32767 (with PROTMODEDISK) 25 PROTLEN2 1 – 32767 (1 – 200 without [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–28 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) BT_Name FlexOS name of the operator panel interface. For operation without the operator panel enter “” only . The default setting is “ SER ” (upper case mandatory). PROTLEN1 This defines the number of messages that are entered in alarm log 1. PROTLEN[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–29 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) For example, the interpretation of following configuration entry: PROTMASK1 K = OT < 4 PROTMASK1 K > OP < 100 PROTMASK2 N1000 – 1 10000 All the NCK alarms with a message type smaller than 4 are entered in the alarm log (i.e. power-on until PLC ala[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–30 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Y ou can reactivate the write enable function on the hard disk of the MMC CPU making an entry to the configuration file of the master control CONFIG (PROT- MODE DISK). This way you can provide for the same compatible behavior as is applicable to systems with[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–31 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.3.1 Configuration file BEDCONF in directory Operation/Basic Setting // . 0 0 0 reftab.tb a 2 5 3 ’MASCHIN’ ’PARAMET’ ’PROGRAM’ ’ANWENDE’ ’DIENSTE’ ’DIAGNOS’ ’ANWENDE’ ’PROGSYS’ ’PLC’ ’PLC_DG’ ’PLC_PR’ ’DG[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–32 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ // BAPPLMENMODLIST i 1 1 15000 // BAPPLIND i 2 2 15002 ’ 0 ’ ’ 1 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 2 ’ ’ 1 ’ ’ 1 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–33 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ // TermiIBN a 1 1 3 a 2 1 114 ’ 7 ’ ’ 11 ’ ’ 12 ’ ’ 13 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ ’ 0 ’ // TermiSimulation //[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–34 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) BPOSNEG_DEF The parameter BPOSNEG_DEF sets whether the screen display is to be in posi- tive mode (enter PO) or in negative mode (enter NE). Y ou can enter PO or NE here but be sure to enter the parameter in capital letters. Positive mode means black letteri[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–35 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The parameters below contain the preset values for block generation. BEASA TZNR_FLAG_ The BEASA TZNR_FLAG_DFL T word specifies the selection; DFL T block number YES parameter = 1 or block number NO parameter = 0. BAESA TZNR_STEP_ The value specified in BAESA[...]

PRESET SA VE 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–36 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) With a main memory capacity of 16 MB the mutual exclusion of certain applica- tions can be cancelled. This is the case for the mutual exclusion of the optional applications WOP and SIMULA TION. T o cancel the exclusion of WOP , the following lin[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–37 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The configured texts are activated on Power on. 35 L F 36 a 4 5 232 // Values for 37 ’– ’ ’Slide1’ ’Slide2’ ’PORTAL’ ’Loader’ L F 38 d 1 1 0 L F 39 L F Fig. 4.16 4.4.3.3 Configuration file BEDCONF in directory/Operation/DIAGNOS If cha[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–38 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.4 Color definition tables 4.4.4.1 10” color display (up to SW 4.4) 6FC5 103 –0AB V 2–0BA0 Introduction In the color definition tables, you can define the individual colors by mixing RGB proportions. The operator system reserves a default color tabl[...]

PRESET 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–39 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Changing the file POCOCLUT for the MACHINE area If no CLUT s are available in the user branch OPERA TION/MACHINE, they must be copied from the Siemens branch to the user branch with the softkey . Fig. 4.18 The file POCOCLUT is selected with the cursor[...]

SA VE 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–40 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The change is made in the ASCII editor and must be saved on the hard disk using the softkey save. The new colors become active after the next POWER ON. The value range for each primary color is between 0 and 1000. 1000 is the hig- hest intensity of col[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–41 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.4.2 New 19 ” operator panel as from SW 4.5 (5) 6FC5 103 –0AB VV – V AA1 Standard CLUT table There is a new standard POCOCLUT and NECOCLUT table for color . The values entered then apply to the 19 ” operator panel with a 14 ” color screen and th[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–42 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Color table For positive screen display: For negative screen display: Standard setting 8 tones of grey POMOCLUT NEMOCLUT Color index Color Red Green Blue Color Red Green Blue 0 black 0 0 0 black 0 0 0 1 grey 0 0 0 grey 627 627 627 2 black 0 0 0 white 1000 10[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–43 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.4.3 Defining individual color tables (as from SW 5.4) Introduction As from SW 5.4, the user can define his own color tables (for example, for different displays). The names for the color tables (object type clut) of the applications are selectable; howev[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–44 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.5 Color mapping lists Introduction The operator system works with symbolic colors represented by numbers within the range 0 to 127. For example, the background of the softkey bars is in color 65. A real color (from the color table) is assigned to color 6[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–45 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Example 1 Suppose we want to change the background color of the softkey bar . In the (with color and table for assigning picture elements to symbolic colors , the symbolic positive display modes) color code for the softkey bar background is the number 65. In[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–46 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Symbolic color Picture elements Back- ground color T ext color T ext back- ground Border color Border backgr . Configuration area 0 and 1 89 free 88 –– –– Application field 88 –– –– –– –– Cursor text in config. area –– free 88 –[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–47 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.6 Color settings for monochrome display 4.4.6.1 10” monochrome display (up to SW 4.4) 6FC5 103 –0AB V 2–0AA0 Introduction The BEDCONF , NECOLLI and NEMOCLUT files have to be edited for improving the quality of the screen display . In addition, an a[...]

Save as cycle Delete cycle 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 4–48 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.4.7 Cycles Press the DIAGNOSIS and PC DA T A softkeys to select the cycles area. This area is password-protected. SPF .. subroutines stored in a workpiece in the LOCAL or GLOBAL directory can be copied into the NC/data directory i[...]

MODIFY OPTIONS OK 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–49 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.5 Activating options (as from SW3) Press the DIAGNOSIS/ST ART -UP/OPTIONS softkeys to change over to the Op- tions basic display . Fig. 4.21 Note A PLC cold restart is required before you can implement PLC expansions. Note The total numbe[...]

ACTIV A TE OPTIONS 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–50 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Press the select key to select. Press the ACTIV A TE OPTIONS key for activating the selected option. Notes The options Graphic Programming System T urning/Milling, DIN simulation, PG software and special languages cannot be activated via t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–51 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Accessing the CD ROM via PC link software (SW 6 and higher) Installation sequence A software update can be made with PC link (SW 6 and higher). The software is delivered on CD ROM. 10. Install the PC link on the external PC by starting the file ” install.b[...]

ST ART 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–52 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Selecting BACKUP Press the softkeys DIAGNOSIS then ST ART -UP 1) then BACKUP to obtain the basic display for BACKUP . When BACKUP is selected, the entire MMC area is stopped. The NC must be in the RESET state. When you have pressed the softkey BACKUP [...]

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–53 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Backup menu tree Restore/backup (first install correct streamer with Item 2/Item3 set streamer type) Install MMC system When you select menu item 1, new MMC software, SW options (e.g. graphic program- ming) or software updates are[...]

2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 3 5 6 3 4 5 6 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–54 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Setup / Configure options Setup WOP options See Configuring Guide Graphic Programming System Create WOP working file Service function for creating a new WOP working file Set I/O device V alitek PST–160 V alitek PST2 – [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–55 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Activating the hard The hard disk is configured with 5 Mbytes for user data. It is possible to use disk options more memory area if one or several hard disk options are activated. A hard disk (up to SW 3 only) option makes one of three areas of the hard disk[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–56 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.8 Functions up to SW 2 4.8.1 NC data management (up to SW 2) As from SW 3 NC data management has been moved to the Services area. Please refer to the Operator ’ s Guide for more detailed information. The description below applies to SW 1 and SW 2. In the[...]

SA VE ST ART 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–57 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) MACHINE P ARAMETER PROGRAMM. SERVICES 14:22 Start-up/SIEMENS/NC data Start-up/User/NC data NC/data Name Length Date NC/data Name Length Date ... .. TEA1 96145 02–17–1993 13:21:22 SEA1 96145 02–18–1992 08:06:36 SEA1 10440 02–17–1993 1[...]

OK LOAD EDIT 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–58 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) During data transmission the following dialog text appears: !!! T ransmission of NC to PC active !!! If a file of the same name already exists, you are asked if you want to overwrite this file: PC data exist. Overwrite ? Y ou acknowledge with th[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–59 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.8.2 PLC data (up to SW 2) As from SW 3 NC data management has been moved to the Services area. Please refer to the Operator ’ s Guide for more detailed information. In the DIAGNOSIS PLC data management area you can save PCF files or PLC machine data on t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–60 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.8.3 PCF files (up to SW 2) From SW 3 the files MELDDA TR and MELDTEXT are re- sponsible for the entire alarm concept. Configuration is de- scribed in the Interface Description Part 1, Signals. PCF files are files in which the user can store alarm texts and[...]

SERVICES MANAGEMENT NEW NEW 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–61 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Creating a file in the SERVICES area Select the SERVICES area. Press the MANAGEMENT softkey . Press NEW softkey . Select PLC in the directory of all possible subdirectories in the user branch using the cursor keys and accept with [...]

LOAD OK OK DIAGNOSIS PLC data management 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–62 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Name Length Date PLC/data Name Length Date .. PCF1 18 03–12–1993 1 1:14:00 LADER 0 03–12–1993 1 1:10:34 PCF1 1 0 03–12–1993 1 1:02:14 TUER1 0 03–12–1993 1 1:05:08 Start-up/SIEMENS/PLC data PLC/data . .[...]

SA VE Programm. EDIT NC SELECT PROGRAM SA VE ST ART OK 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–63 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Y ou can create the PCF file with the ASCII editor , configuring is described in In- terface Description Part 1. The ASCII editor is described in the Operator ’ s Guide. Y ou store the file onto the ha[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–64 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Setting data for PCF files: Y ou define the active PCF file in the general setting data. The setting data are described in the Operator ’ s Guide.       ?[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 4–65 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 4.9 Equivalent keys on the PC keyboard and the operator panel The following table lists all keys that have a different form on the PC keyboard and the operator panel control but the same function. PC keyboard Operator panel Function Home, POS1 Home key End E[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5 Machine Data Dialog (MDD – as from SW 3) 5.1 General remarks Introduction The SINUMERIK 840C and Machine Data Dialog operation. The Machine Data Dialog replaces the conventional method of entering machine data via lists. Wherever possible, the machine data[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note Press the info key to display a short description of the machine configuration. Fig. 5.1 Explanation The machine configuration display gives you an overview of the current data record and is only a display . The functions and setpoint/actual value assignm[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Axes S Name: The name of the axis appears in this window when NC MD 5680 ff (axis name) is set. Possible input values are: X – X15, Y – Y15, Z – Z15, A – A15, B– B15, C – C15, U – U15, V – V15, W – W15, Q – Q15, E – E15. S Function: Poss[...]

Search Password 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.1.1 General notes on operation Search (SW 3 and higher) Select the Search function with this key . Explanation With this function you can either search for a “T erm” (e.g. following spindle) or a machine data. When you have selected the f[...]

Calc. con- troll. data 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) MD info window (SW 3 and higher) Select the MD info window function with the “ End ” hardkey . Fig. 5.2 Explanation With the “ End ” hardkey you can call up an info window for any machine data on which the cursor is placed (not [...]

+ Copy to clipboard Paste from clipboard 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Current controller: MD 1 120 P gain current controller (FDD/MSD) MD 1 121 Reset time current controller (FDD/MSD) Flux controller: MD 1 150 P gain flux controller (MSD) MD 1 151 Reset time flux controller (MSD) T orque[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.1.2 Fast switching between MDD and service display (as from SW 5) Service displays In all axis specific displays it is possible to select the axis service display with the for axes highest vertical softkey . The data are requested via I code 20E. The refres[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–8 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Service display for several axes Fig. 5.4 In the three-axis display , the units column is omitted for space reasons. Selecting columns The columns are selected using the home key . In each column which is selected, the axis can be selected as in the single-ax[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–9 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.2 NC configuration and NC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.2.1 NC configuration Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up NC MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and NC MD softkeys to call the NC configuration display . Note A brief description of the[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–10 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Spindle S Mode group: The assignment of mode group to spindle is determined by the setting in NC MD 4530 ff (spindle valid in mode group). S Available: The spindle is displayed as existing when NC MD 5210.7 ff (spindle exists) is set. Axis No. S Mode group: [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5– 11 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.2.2 NC machine data Menu tree NC MD (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (8) General NC MD Geometry motion Channel Axis Spindle Gearbox interpol. File functions Memory config. (SW 4) General Basic MD Face axis functions Modes Keyswitch [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–12 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note A list of the individual NC machine data is given on the following pages. The machine data are grouped according to their functions within these areas. The functions of the individual machine data are described in the section entitled “ NC Machine Dat[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–13 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Softkey Controller data This softkey contains position controller , compensation, feedforward control, filter setting and travel to fixed stop machine data. SW 4 also contains quadrant error compensation (from SW 4.4) machine data. Softkey LEC This softkey c[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–14 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.2.3 Setpoint-Actual value matching for axes and spindles The following NC machine data still have to be set before you can operate the drives after drive installation. Y ou will find them by pressing the Diagnosis/Start- up/Machine data/NC MD softkeys for t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–15 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.2.4 Measuring system adaptation for axes and spindles (as from SW 4) Explanation This function is used to automatically calculate the position control resolution and measuring system resolution (optimization of the closed position control loop). Y ou will [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–16 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Motor measuring system example Information required: m + rxl 4xpxf Gearbox factor: r + r1 (leadscrew) r2 (motor) Leadscrew pitch: l Pulses per revolution: p Pulse multiplication: f Linear measuring system example Information required: m + rxg 4xf Gearbox fac[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–17 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.2.5 Copying a complete machine data block (as from SW 5.6) General The “ NC configuration ” basic screen contains the softkeys for copying and inserting complete spindle and axis data blocks. The “ Drive configuration ” basic screen contains the so[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–18 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.3 PLC configuration and PLC machine data (as from SW 3) 5.3.1 PLC configuration Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up PLC MD The PLC configuration display appears on the screen when you press the Dia- gnosis, Start-up, Machine data and PLC MD softkeys.[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–19 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) S Address: The address assignment for the 1st machine control panel is determined in PLC MD 128 (initial address for 1st machine control panel). S TT machine: The setting in PLC MD 6066.4 (configuration 1st machine control panel TT machine) determines whethe[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–20 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.3.2 PLC machine data Menu tree PLC MD Peripheral setting (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Alarms, messages PLC basic data User MD T ool managem. Computer link File functions DMP config. Interrupts Process alarms General Channel Axis Progr[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–21 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) (1) PLC MD/Peripherals setting Softkey This softkey contains various interface DMP interface and PLC 135 WD DMP configuration user machine data. Softkey Interrupts This softkey contains central and distributed interrupt machine data. Softkey This softkey con[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–22 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.4 Drive configuration and drive machine data (as from SW 3) 5.4.1 Drive configuration Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up Drive MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and Drive MD softkeys to display the drive configuration display . Note Pre[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–23 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.4.2 Drive machine data for axes (FDD) and spindles (MSD) Menu tree (1) (2) (1) (2) Drive MD Axis (FDD) Spindle (MSD) Motor/PS data Monitor’g, limitation Message data File functions Meas. sys. data Controller data Status data File functions Motor/PS data [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–24 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Softkey This softkey contains status display , current values (drive/servo), status register , Status Data motor encoder diagnostics, min., max. memory , monitor function, I/F mode, diagnostics servo and communications servo/61 1D machine data. SW 3 also con[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–25 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note Any number from 1 to 15 (up to SW 4, from SW 5, 1-30) in any order can be used for the drive number . Power-up is performed and the bus initialized using the softkey Accept conf + NCKPO . The message Start-up necessary is also displayed, i.e. the individ[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–26 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) On SW5 and higher , it is possible to enter non-Siemens motors for which only the rating plate data of the motor is known and not the equivalent circuit diagram data (motor data). After you have pressed the softkey Non-Siemens motor 1 (Non-Siemens mo- tor 2)[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–27 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.5 Cycles machine data (as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up Cycles MD Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and Cycle MD softkeys to call up the cycles machine data display . Fig. 5.8 Explanation Measuring cycles and machining cycl[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–28 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.6 IKA data (interpolation and compensation with tables – as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up IKA data Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and IKA data softkeys to call up the IKA data display . Fig. 5.9 Explanation Machine too[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–29 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) individual data are described in the functional description of “ Interpolation and compensation with tables ” (Installation Guide). IKA data Softkey This softkey contains various IKA data (T parameters) that define the IKA configuration configuration. So[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–30 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.7 User displays (as from SW 3) Selection Diagnosis Machine data Start-up User displays Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and User MD softkeys to call up the User displays screen. Fig. 5.10 Explanation The user can configure his own lists of machi[...]

Edit list 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–31 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.7.1 Edit list Select the softkey edit list in the User display area. Fig. 5.1 1 Explanation The header contains information about the display format and addressing the data. Only the parameters for the display layout in the header may be altered.[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–32 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) machine data, place the cursor on a free or an occupied line. Then select the re- quired function using the softkey Insert/overwrite and then enter the machine data number . Jump back to the user displays using the Save softkey and the Recall key and the mac[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 5–33 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.8 File functions (as from SW 3) 5.8.1 1st level: Machine configuration (as from SW 3) Fig. 5.12 Drive MD NC MD PLC MD Cycle MD IKA data User MD File functions Explanation On the first level the file functions refer to all the machine data areas (Drives, NC,[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–34 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) In the case of “ Save all ” the NQEC parameterization including the measured val- ues from the NCK/servo are read out and stored in ASCII files under the selected name. In the case of “ Load all ” , the selected NQEC ASCII files are read in and store[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–35 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.8.3 3rd level: Configuring within the machine data areas of individual machine data displays (as from SW 3) Motor/ PS data Monitoring limitation Message data Meas. sys. data Controller data Status data File functions Axis (TEA3) Motor/ PS data Monitoring l[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–36 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) User MD (TEA2) Edit list Edit texts File functions T ool management (TEA2) Basic data Magazine 1 Magazine 2 Magazine 3 Magazine 4 File functions Computer link (TEA2) System setting General functions T ool dialog code carr . File functions Central cycle MD (T[...]

Edit New Edit Delete 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–37 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.8.4 File functions (sequence of operation – as from SW 3) 5.8.4.1 1st level: File functions Diagnosis Start-up File functions Machine data Explanation Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data and File functions softkeys to call th[...]

Copy Save to disk Load from disk 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–38 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Selected file can be copied. The on-line file data are saved into the selected file. Here again the BOOT file has a special status (see drive installation/start-up). The lower user data area must be selected. The selected fil[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–39 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Fig. 5.14 Explanation The functions of the individual softkeys are the same as for the first level. Notes With the Save to disk softkey , you can choose between Conf ( 8 drive configu- ration only) and All . With the Load from disk softkey , you can choose b[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–40 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.8.4.3 3rd level: File functions Selection (Example drive MD axis) Diagnosis Machine data Start-up Drive MD Axis (FDD) File functions Explanation Press the Diagnosis, Start-up, Machine data, Drive MD (e.g.), Axis (FDD) and File functions softkeys to call up[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–41 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Example: File function 3rd level NC MD This can be seen from the example of the NC machine data structure. On the 3rd level, in each case the display contents (selected list display) are saved or loa- ded, and this can be extended to include (for instance) a[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–42 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9 Procedure for altering configurations 5.9.1 Standard installation of digital drives (as from SW 3) Specifications (Example) Drive modules 1 double axis FDD module 2 single axis FDD module 1 MSD module Module slots: Slot 1: MSD module (Installation locati[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–43 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Motor selection Press the Diagnosis/Start-up/Machine data/Drive MD and Axis (FDD) or Spindle (MSD) softkeys to call up the display motor/PS data to make the motor selection. Select the actual motor type with the Enter motor softkey . Once you have selec- ted[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–44 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.2 Adding a 1-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) Specifications Module slots: Slot 1: MSD module (Installation location) Slot 2: free Slot 3: free Slot 4: 2 axis FDD module Slot 6: 1 axis FDD module Entering the Enter the additional 1 axis FDD module for slot[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–45 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.3 Replacing a 1-axis FDD module with a 2-axis FDD module (as from SW 3) Requirement A 1-axis FDD module is to be replaced by a 2-axis FDD module with the same current rating. Module slots: Slot 1: MSD module (Installation loc.) Slot 2: 1-axis FDD module [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–46 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.4 Replacing a 2-axis FDD module (9/18 A) with a 2-axis FDD module (18/36 A) (as from SW3) Specifications A 2-axis FDD module (9/18 A) is to be replaced by a 2-axis FDD module (18/36 A) with a higher current rating. Module slots: Slot 1: MSD module (Insta[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–47 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.5 Drive active or passive (as from SW3) Application For example, when using a 2-axis FDD module, one of the axes is disconnected from the bus temporarily . Procedure Switch the axis from the active to the passive state in the drive configuration display [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–48 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.6 Using a new motor type (as from SW 3) Application A new motor type is to be installed on the machine tool. The same drive module is used. Procedure Operate the Enter motor softkey in the Motor/PS data display . Select the type of motor you want. If you[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–49 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.9.7 Reinstallation of existing and new drive components using the existing drive files (TEA3) Application Y ou require a two-tier configuration, i.e. a 2nd module group is to be added. TEA3 user files already exist for the individual modules and motors. Pr[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–50 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Fig. 5.24 Procedure 2 Select the File functions softkey in the machine configuration display and operate the Load from disk softkey . A menu bar appears into which you enter the required TEA3 file together with file name and select the All MD area with the t[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–51 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 5.10 Configuring the MDD 5.10.1 Description The MDD is configured with the list module (as from SW4). The texts in the screens can be edited. The data that are to be displayed in the screens have been configured. As from SW 5, it is possible to print out the[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–52 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The paths and file names and simple examples of file contents (configuring data) are explained in the points below . Other configuration possibilities are given in the lists in the control. List module paths ASCII lists: and files S Data lists (e.g.) (e.g. T[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–53 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) List contents: The texts for all data are stored in the text lists . T ext lists Examples: 2040 “ Exact stop limit coarse” 2080 “ Exact stop limit fine” 5600.0 “ No measuring circuit monitoring ” 5600.2 “ Rounding to whole/half degrees ” List[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–54 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Solution The following steps are necessary: 1. The file list of the display in which the data is to appear must be copied com- pletely from the Siemens branch to the user branch ( “ Services ” area) so that the user semantics and user text lists are used[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–55 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) c) The already altered characteristics of a data are to be changed again or the characteristics of another data in the same display are to be changed. If the data list of this display was already copied into the user branch when the first change was made and[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–56 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) for which the following short-hand notation can now be used (SW 4 and higher): Example: 1500:1–8 By resorting it is possible to display in the usual way first all the data of the first parameter set, then the data of the second parameter set, etc. Example:[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 5–57 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Example: headline “ S16 P3 N7 ” This reserves 16 characters for the parameter name (e.g. the word “ axis ” ), 3 cha- racters for the current parameter number (e.g. axis number) and 7 characters for the number of the current parameter (e.g. “ C2 ”[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1 NC machine data (NC MD) 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD) NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1 NC machine data (NC MD) 6.1.1 Entering NC machine data NC machine data are used to adapt the NC to the machine tool. It is up to the person installing to ascertain and optimize all items of machine data not pres[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.1.1 Entering NC machine data Note: With SW 3 and higher, the machine data are called in the MDD. The machine data dialog replaces the previous method of entering MD. See the ”Machine Data Dialog” section for sequence of operation. Notes: • The meaning of an NC MD bit always refers to [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.3 Configuring information 6.1.3 Configuring information Two 1) mode groups and four 1) channels can be implemented on the SINUMERIK 840C. The channels are allocated to the mode groups via machine data, i.e. the channels are subordinate to the mode groups. The available axes are also alloc[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.1.3 Configuring information Tasks performed by the master channel Within a mode group, the channels are processed in ascending order. Internally, the first channel of a mode group (the channel with the lowest number) assumes the role of master channel. If the signals • mode group • DRF [...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs / drive machine data 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs/drive machine data NC MD Description Softkey Section 0 to 999 General MD General data 6.2 1000 to 1599 Channel-specific MD Channel data 6.3 2000 to 3999 Axis-specific MD 1 Axial data 1 6.4 4000 to 4999 Spindle-specific M[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 03.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Velocity behind pre-limit switch 1 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 +0 100 000 1 000 units/ min (IS) Active on NC Stop Velocity diagram on crossing the software limit switch with circula[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Corner deceleration rate 3 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 +0 100 000 1 000 units/ min (IS) Active on NC Stop In continuous-path operation (G64), block transitions are covered without feedrate reduction, i.e. the path is roun[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.2 General machine data (general data) Note: The reduction speed with G62 is not quite reached. The error tolerance band is described as follows. FG62 = Reduction speed Fact = ”Actual reduction speed” reached Fdecel = Braking step (speed reduction per Ipo cycle) FG62 F act (FG62 + F dece[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Threshold for switchover intersection * 6 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 +0 16 000 2 000 (as from SW 4) units (IS) Active in next block One or two intermediate blocks are inserted for circle intersection (straight line / a[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 03.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) Circle end position monitoring 7 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 +0 32 000 units (IS) Active in next block Before a circular block is processed, the NC checks the "correctness" of the programmed values by determining [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Error window for repositioning on circle contour 9 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 +0 32 000 units (IS) Active in next block An automatic interruption during circular contouring (G2 / G3) results in departure from the contour[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs / drive machine data Feed after block search 10 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 +0 100 000 1 000 units/ min (IS) Active in next block If the machining program is started via a block search at a particular block rather than from the begin[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.1.4 Breakdown of NC MDs / drive machine data Number of TO parameters 13 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 10 32 – Active see below Normally, each tool offset has up to ten permanently allocated TO parameters. When required, the user can upgrade the number of param[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) Keyswitch-protected R parameters 16, 17 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 999 * 1 299 (as from SW 4) – Active at once Password-protected R parameters 14, 15 Active at once Appropriate specifications NC MD 14/15 and / or 16 / [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Number of Execution Memory Sectors 30 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 10 5 1 000 Sector Active on Power On Active: on POWER ON When ”Working from external” or from the hard disk, the part program is read into a circular buffe[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.2 General machine data (general data) Positions 2 to 32 of the feedrate override switch 100 - 130 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below 0 150 % Active at once Use can be made of a feedrate override switch with up to 32 positions. The percent figures may be alloca[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Position control basic cycle time 155 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 41 1) 40 Multiple of drive basic cycle time Active on Power On The sampling interval is defined as the time after which the control outputs a new setpoint spee[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.2 General machine data (general data) 2. Delay for removal of the servo enable signal on the measuring circuit following "EMERGENCY STOP" and other errors resulting in immediate shutdown of the axes (e.g. contour monitoring). 3. Delay for removal of the servo enable signal on the [...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Dead time for calculation for extended thread 164 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 36 28 (SW 5 and higher) –4 8 1/8 of the IPO cycle Active – This machine data is preset by the system and should not be altered by the user. The[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) The number of areas is specified in NC MD 210. The number of TO areas is limited to between 1 and 4. One TO area is provided when a value of 0 is entered. If the specified value exceeds 4, it is set to 4 internally and alarm 47 triggered. The limits of [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) TO area 1 Absolute D number D1 D29 TO area 2 TO area 3 TO area 4 D1 D29 D1 D25 D30 D54 D55 D1 D95 D1 D149 D150 D204 D55 TO memory D no. to be programmed for each TO area (for display also) User menu for JOG 229 Default value Lower input limit Upper inpu[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) Language switchover 1) 250 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 001– Active on Power On SINUMERIK 840C can display two languages at option. The following entries are possible: 0 = Language 1 1 = Language 2 The following language com[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) When allocating the numbers, make sure that there is no collision with other M functions. Generally, the following values are permissible: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 19, 30, 37 Example MD 260 = 123 MD 261 = 456 M1 = 123 L F Selection of C axis operation for [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) MD 312: Mixed I / O assignment for first mode group MD 317: Mixed I / O assignment for sixth mode group The first decimal place (units) defines the output byte of the module. Mixed I/O (1, 2) PLC 1-4. The second decimal place (tens) defines the number o[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Deadtime compensation for dwell referred to axis Actual value (SW 4 and higher) 330 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 550 0 16 000 in % of the IPO cycle Active on NC Stop Sine of angular range for tangential transitions TRC 331 Def[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.2 General machine data (general data) Minimum reduction factor (as from SW 6) 335 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 100 % Active at once The minimum reduction factor is entered as a percentage in the general machine data. The actual path velocity is adapted to th[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) 2nd MCS offset in Z coordinates (as from SW 6) 339 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Note: For further information see description of the function collision monitoring. 3rd MCS offset in X coordinates (as[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.2 General machine data (general data) 1st transformation, parameters 1 to 10* 730 - 739 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 -99 999 999 99 999 999 units (IS) Active on Power On 2nd transformation, parameters 1 to 10 740 - 749 Default value Lower input limit Upper input[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.2 General machine data (general data) Leading axis coupled axis 876 - 899 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 009– Active on Power On 1) The definition of these coupled axis groupings determines which axis is to be coupled when a leading axis is traversed in Jog mode o[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.2 General machine data (general data) d. It must be possible to program the axes of one coupled axis grouping in the same channels MD 576* bits 7 to 0 and MD 580*, bits 7 to 0. e. The axes in a coupled axis grouping must be available (NC MD 564* bit 7 = 1). f. None of the axes of a coupled [...]

10.94 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) Mode group 100* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 0 (SW 4 and higher) 2 6 1) – Active on Power On Warm restart MD 1000 must be set to "1" (default). Gaps are not allowed in MD 1[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) Reset state G group 108*-122* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see below see table of input values see table of input values – Active in block prior to decodg The reset state for G groups 1, 3, 6, 8, 12, 15 and 25 may be defined [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) Internal G group G functions 9 80 M / T 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 10 90 M / T 91 68 11 94 M MD 95 T MD 96 MD 97 MD 98 MD 295 1) 12 147 247 347 148 248 348 48 110 111 112 13 50 M/T 51 14 150 M / T MD 151 MD 152 MD 153 MD 154 MD 155 MD 156 MD 157 MD 158 M[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) Device No. for Execution from external 132* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 0 Active – NC MD 132* defines the device type number used to read in data for "Execution from external" for each channel. The device numbe[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.3 Channel-specific MD (channel data) • The function can also be switched off via the PLC (Program control, DB10-15, DR14, bit 3, DL2, bit 3). The channel-specific initial settings for ZO (G54 - G57) and TO (D number 0 - 819) after POWER On are defined in NC MD 140* and 142*. With these va[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Assignment of axis to actual-value port (analog) 200* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 05030000 – Active on Power On Simulation axes and spindles are defined if no measuring system has be[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) 1st measuring system connection (as from SW 3) 200* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 15021015 (up to SW 4) 30021030 (as from SW 5) – Active on Power On 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digit No. 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 Logical drive no. (611-D) No. o[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 03.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Coarse stop tolerance range 204* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 40 +0 16 000 units (MS) 40 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop The value defining the ”Coarse stop tolerance range ”can be higher than tha[...]

03.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Fine stop tolerance range 208* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 10 +0 16 000 units (MS) 10 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop A traversing movement is completed when the axis has reached the setpoint position + - [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 03.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Zero-speed monitoring 212* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 16 000 units (MS) 100 0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop Coarse exact stop Negative axis direction Fine exact stop Zero-speed monitoring Posit[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Backlash compensation 1st measuring system 220* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 –16 000 16 000 units (MS) Active on NC Stop In the case of axes with indirect measuring systems, mechanical backlash results in corruption of the t[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 10.94 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) The software limit switches cannot fulfil their function correctly until the reference point has been approached and NC MD 560 * 5 has been set to "1". The software limit switches are always approached at the speed defined in NC MD 1 unless a lo[...]

10.94 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Reference point value 240* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 ±0 99 999 999 units (MS) Active on NC Stop The difference between absolute machine zero and the fixed reference point is entered for the respective axis. These values ar[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 10.94 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Reference point shift 244* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 99 999 999 99 999 999 units (MS) Active on NC Stop Reference point shift is used to shift the reference points of the measuring system. Instead of mechanical shifting o[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) MD 244* Ref. point Velocity Ref. cam Ref. point pulse Path 2000 units V S MD 244* > 0 (e.g. 1000 units) MD 244* Ref. point Velocity Ref. cam Ref. point pulse Path 2000 units V S MD 244* less than 0 (e.g. 700 units) © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserve[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) K v factor 252* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 666 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01 s -1 Active on NC Stop When specifying the K V factor, attention must be paid to the fact that the gain factor for the entire position contro[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Scaling factor maximum speed setpoint 260* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 8 000 1) 10 000 2) 9 000 3) 1 0 1 99 999 999 20 000 20 000 0.01 % of max. setpoint Active for all channels of mode groups in STOP Active: for all channels o[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Maximum setpoint speed (IPO stop) 268* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 8 192 1) 10 000 2) 10 000 3) +0 0 0 8 192 20 000 20 000 VELO 0.01 % of max. motor speed Active on NC Stop This entry defines the maximum voltage value to be out[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Acceleration 276* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 +0 16 000 (SW 3) 9999 9999 (as from SW 4) 99 000 000 (as from SW 4.4) units 10 000 ––––– S 2 Active on NC Stop V [m / min] V max Rapid traverse Identical slope t [s] 0 [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) MD 276* is calculated as follows: Maximum speed [rev / min] . 360 degrees / input resolution MD 276* = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 6[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Jog feedrate 288* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2 000 +0 99 999 000 1 000 units/min (IS) Active on NC Stop The specified value applies to travel in JOG mode with the feedrate override switch set to 100%. The value in NC MD 288* m[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Interpolation parameter name 304* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units see table +0 3 – Active in next block Default values 840C (T) 840C (M) 3040 1 1 3041 3 2 3042 0 3 3043 . . 3069 0 . . 0 0 . . 0 In the case of circular movements ([...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Limiting frequency C axis encoder 308* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 16 000 kHz Active on Power On The limiting frequency of the C axis actual value encoder is entered in machine data 308*. The limiting frequency can be tak[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) The NC activates leadscrew error compensation (SSFK) after reaching the reference point. The CNC must therefore be informed via MD 316* as to which of the 1000 possible compensation points represents the reference point for the axis in question. Separate [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Contour threshold speed 336* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 +0 1 000 000 1 000 units/min (IS) Active on Power On NC MD 336* is used to define the speed at which the contour monitor is to be activated. At speeds below this axis-s[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) u: Variable increment weighting pulses 364* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 11 65 000 (SW 1) 9999 9999 (as from SW 2) – Active on Power On v: Variable increment weighting traversing path 368* Default value Lower input limit Upper[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) The following parameters are used for adaption to the measuring system: Parameter Symbol MD Meaning Position control resolution b 1800* (Bit 0-3) Internal computational resolution of the control Multiplier for EXE f (signifies e.g. a five-fold EXE multipl[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) m = 360 degrees 4pf • A rotary axis is used: • The ROD encoder is mounted onto the motor and the gearing is located between the motor and the leadscrew: m = × r I 4p Example 2: Same values as above, except b = 0.5 × 10 -3 mm; K = 25.4 = m b MD368* =[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) • Linear axis with SIMODRIVE 611-D b = 0.5 x 10 -3 mm l = 10 mm p = 2048 pulses / rev (Motor measuring system) v = 1 x 1 f = ? (SW EXE) m = 0 x 5 x 10 -3 mm (desired) m = l 4 x p x f 1024 625 f = l 4 x p x m = 10 mm 4 x 2048 x 0.5 x 10 -3 mm = 2.44 sele[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Delay time zero speed monitoring 372* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 000 ms Active on Reset NC MD 372* is used to specify the amount of time that is to elapse before zero speed monitoring (NC MD 212*) is to be activated du[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Setpoint output (up to SW 2) 384* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 05120000 – Active on Power On 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digit No. 0 1 0 4 0 0 0 0 Servo loop module no. No. of servo loop setpoint output Example for structure of a val[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Setpoint output (as from SW 3) 384* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 15001000 (up to SW 4) 30001000 (as from SW 5) – Active on Power On 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Digit No. 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 Servo loop module no. Always 0 but has no effec[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Drive/servo loop module No. 3840,6-7 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 Active on Weighting factor for path conversion 388* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 99 999 999 – Active on All chan. of mode[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.4 Axis-specific MD 1 (axial data 1) Time constant symmetrizing filter 392* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 1 000 0.1 ms Active – In order to avoid axis overshooting when working with feedforward control, the set part position is fed to the position controller [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Measuring system connection 400* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 05031000 15021015 (up to SW 4) 30021015 (as from SW 5) – Active on Power On The spindles available on the machine can be[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) in NC MD 403* and 0 in NC MD 404* to 410*. In the case of gear units with fewer than eight gears, 0 should be entered for the non-existing gears (a value other than 0 for a non-existent gear will cause the spindle to come to standstill). Gear input signa[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) MD 403* MD 404* MD 405* MD 448* Voltage [volts] Speed [rev / min] 10 MD 411* MD 412* MD 413* U max If 3rd gear has been engaged, the new S value must be lower than the contents of MD 413* in order for the NC to initiate a gear change. U max : maximum set[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) • You can set MD 419* to 426* so that the motor is accelerated to the current limit for a certain time. If a ramp-up generator is built into the actuator, you can set MD 419* to 426* to 0. In this case, the setpoint changes in steps on acceleration and[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) On an oriented spindle stop (M19), the spindle is included in the position control loop. The gain factor is defined by the steepness of the approach to the cutoff position. If "0" is entered, the position controller loop is broken. Notes: The ?[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Example • S value: 1000 rev / min • Tolerance in MD: 3% The permissible actual speed range is from 970 rev / min to 1030 rev / min. Maximum spindle speed tolerance 445* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 +0 100 10 000 (as from[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Minimum motor setpoint speed 448* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 +0 16 000 rev/min 1) Active on NC Stop NC MD 448* defines the minimum spindle speed. The motor does not fall below this speed, for example, even when the cutting [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 10.94 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Spindle position for external M19 452* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 35 999 0.01° Active on NC Stop If M19 is started by the PLC via the "Position spindle" and "PLC spindle control" signals, the NC posi[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) The parameters for defining MD 455* and 456* can be taken from the table below. Parameters for defining MD 455* and 456* Parameter Symbol Meaning Position control resolution b Reference unit for traversing path Pulses per resolution p Number of encoder p[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) • Encoder mounted to the spindle via the measuring gear; SIPOS unconditioned signal encoder and HMS servo loop module b = 0.5 • 10 -3 degrees p = 2500 pulses per revolution f = 8 HMS pulse multiplication r1 = 2 2 spindle revolutions correspond to r2 [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Notes • Machine data 458* is taken into account only when a HMS servo loop module is used. This MD also has an effect when the measuring system of the digital drive (611-D) is used. • The multiplication factor must be taken into account for variable [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Structure of MD 460* Digit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0104000 0 Example showing the structure of a value in MD 460* Servo loop module number No. of servo loop connection Always 0 for analog module Meaning of the individual terms Digit No. 7, 6 The servo loop mo[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Allocated C axis 461* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 – Active on Power On MD 461* defines which global axis number is used to operate the spindle when it works as C axis. This determines, for instance, which axis-specifi[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) To activate feedforward control set option (6FC5 150-0AS02-0AA0). 1) The feedforward control factor is adapted to the machine stability and the resulting acceleration / deceleration of the spindle. The degree to which the following error is reduced depen[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Input value: =0 static feedforward control (e.g. for AC drives with rise time<position control scan time) 0 dynamic feedforward control (for spindles with rise time>position control scan time) The time constant for setpoint smoothing is only inject[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Acceleration time constant with position controller gears 1-8 478*-485* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 2 000 0 50 000 1 ms Active on Power On Assignments Gear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC MD 478* 479* 480* 481* 482* 483* 484* 485* The control is[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) The set acceleration must not exceed the available acceleration reserves of the drive in position control mode as this will result in large system deviations which are too high and which will cause the drive to come to a standstill (with alarms 156*, 116[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) D component compensatory controller 1) 489* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 Active on Reset These machine data are only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". Together with the built-in test functi[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Emergency retraction threshold 1) 493* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 400 0 16 000 99999999 (SW5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) Active on Reset This machine data is only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". With [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.5 Spindle-specific MD (spindle data) Effect of the input values (different cases): 0: No controlled follow-up; immediate normal follow-up 1...15000: Initial controlled follow-up; switchover to normal follow-up after the delay 15001 and higher: Always controlled follow-up; no switchover to n[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6 Machine data bits 6.6 Machine data bits 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 5000 5001 Name of radius and chamfer Name of the angle Default value MD 840C (T) 840C (M) 5000 0000 0100 0000 0110 5001 0000 0011 0000 0011 Name of radius and chamfer for: Name of angle for[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 5002 Input resolution Possible combinations See table for MD 18 000 Default value: 01000000 For combinations with display resolution (NC MD 1800*) and position control resolution (NC MD 1800*). Active on: NCK Power On The input resol[...]

08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Auxiliary function output before travel No de- celeration at limit switch Working area limitation in force in JOG mode Interpol. params dependent on G91 / G90 Internal WAIT mark synchroni- zation (as from SW 5.6) No NC STOP in dwell block G04S.../G1 4/G24 [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 5 When bit 5 is set, the interpolation parameters (I, J, K) can be programmed either as absolutes (G90) or as increments (G91) in the block (also see NC MD 5007, bit 5). The interpolation parameters for contour definitions (blueprint programming) must [...]

08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 4 When bit 4 is set, the polar coordinate angles (G10, G11, G12, G13) can be programmed as either absolutes (G90) or increments (G91) in the block (also see NC MD 5007, bit 5). Active: In the next block Example: N1 G0 G90 X0 Y0 L F (approach P1) N2 G11[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 2 Bit 2 = 0 , Auxiliary function output during axis movement Bit 2 = 1 , Auxiliary function output prior to travel Active: NC Stop If an auxiliary function (M, S, T, H, D) is also programmed in a traversing block, bit 2 can bring about the following tw[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 2nd NC Start without ref.point all axes Var. increment for DRF (as from SW 6) Mode group spec. sin- gle block, type B Mode group spec. sin- gle block, type A Own rapid traverse override 1st 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5004 handwheel available Default val[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5005 ZO fine ZO coarse R param. angle of rot. TO wear TO geometry KEYSWITCH effective for: Position 1-3 Keyswitch group (configurable) Default value: All 0 Bit 7 to 5 Configured data blocks can be inhibited via keyswitch by se[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 4 Keyswitch lock for input disable GI Bit 4=1 Keyswitch setting=0: not possible to program gear interpolation (ELG) via input display. Keyswitch setting 0: programming of gear interpolation (ELG) via input display possible. Bit 4=0 Keyswitch locking no[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Note: If the MD bit is not set, the last function to be programmed in the block is active. Example: added incrementally to previous G58 X... value new absolute entry of Y value (Y = 100) G58 X... G91 X50... G90 Y100 Example: Mixed programming G90/91 in one[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NS SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 1 Bit 1 = 0 All zero point offsets are deselected with G53 (G54-G59 + ext. ZO). Bit 1 = 1 G53 has same effect as @706, all zero offsets (G54-G59 + ext. ZO), DRF and PRESET are deselected with G53 or with @706. Tool offset (TO) is not deselected. Suppre[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5008 Path dimension from PLC without NC STOP REPOS in JOG mode INC and REF in JOG mode TO type 0 identical with type 20 CC with mode group disable (as from SW 5) Effect of CANCEL key channel- specific (as from SW 2) Default va[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Acknowledging the channel-specific cancel alarm via operator panel (BT) Cancel alarms are acknowledged with the key. With MD 5008 bit 0 you can set whether the key affects all channel-specific alarms or only those of the selected (actual channel) . Other c[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 6 Bit 6=1 An extended tool parameter basic display with 12 parameters (P0 ...P11) is displayed. MD 13, "Number of parameter values per D no.", is monitored for greater than, equal to 12 on Power On and Format tool offset memory. Bit 6=0 The e[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5012 Do not delete work- piece name with PLC program selection (as from SW 3) Write MD disabled by @ Sign change handwheel 2 (as from SW 6.3) Sign change handwheel 1 (as from SW 6.3) Default value: All 0 Active: In the next bl[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 2 This bit indicates whether the programmed address extension or the M and S address extension automatically generated by the control is to be transferred to the PLC interface (in the control, the address extension is always in force, except for emerge[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5014 Tool radius compen- sation (TRC) Blueprint program- ming Cycles (ref. con- ditioning) Extended contour def. progr. Thread revolution feedrate G33 / G95 Default value 840 C-T: 1010 0001 Default value 840 C-M: 1010 0000 Act[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5016 Slave axis sorting 1) Bit 7 Bit 7=0 In slave axis cascading, the arithmetic sequence is selected in such a way that no dead times occur. A slave axis ring triggers alarm 3085 "NC CPU time monitoring" Bit 7=1 If [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5018 Second CP module First CP module Path dimension from PLC Indexing division from PLC File transfer Default value: All 0 Bit 5 Path dimension from PLC, F73 This function provides a way of traversing NC axes in incremental o[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5020 Emergency retraction off (as from SW4.7 SW 5.2) Default value: 0 Bit 2 Bit 2 = 1 Emergency retraction off (G420) for all channels Meaning: Monitoring of the ER sources, specified via MD, OFF for: - the channel where the p[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5022 Delay of the NC ready signal by 1 IPO cycle in case of PLC failure or 5 V under- voltage (as from SW 6.3) Consider software limit switch emergency retraction (as from SW 6) 5 V under- voltage (as from SW 6.3) Retraction i[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5025 Reload workpiece on power on (as from SW 2) Endlessly turning rotary axis Alarm ”Axis not in C axis mode” Travel thru transform. center (as from SW 5) Extended threading package Axis- specific G functions to PLC Bit 7[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Bit 2 The extended threading package contains the following functions: a) Following error compensation b) Multiple-turn thread c) Thread recutting logic a) Following error compensation This function corrects the start angle of the spindle by the following [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5028 (as from SW 6) 4th MCS mirroring Z 4th MCS mirroring Y 4th MCS mirroring X Mirroring of the axis in question of the 4th machine coordinate system at the coordinate origin opposite the collision monitoring coordinate syste[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5051 Cycle setting data Default value: All 0 By setting the relevant NC MD bit, entries and modifications through the NC operator panel can be prevented with the keyswitch. Bit 0 Cycles setting data Active: At once 7 6 5 4 3 2[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5053 Axis display for all mode groups (as from SW 6) Channel- spec. axis and spindle display 1) Default value: 0 Bit 0 Channel-specific axis and spindle display (as from SW 5) Bit 0=1 Display of the axes according to the setti[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Note on WS800A: With the multichannel display option, the user can, of course, continue to configure channel- specific axis and spindle displays with the data groups and data types for multichannel display whatever the setting in the new machine data bit. [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5060 5061 5062 to 5069 G function for transformation selection (1st block) Axis name (1st block) Transformation channel number (1st block) Default values MD 5060, 5061: All bits default to 0 " MD 5062 to 5069: All bits de[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5080 5081 5082 to 5089 Transformation channel number (3rd block) G function for transformation selection (3rd block) Axis name (3rd block) See MD 5060 MD for 3rd TRANSFORMATION BLOCK. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5090 to 5139[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5141 to 5146 Ethernet address The Ethernet address is the address of the bus interface module within the network. Active: On POWER ON NC MD Ethernet address (Binary) Byte Decimal Default value 5141 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Byte 1 08 0 [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5147 Protect EPROM cycles from overwrit. (as from SW 4) Do not delete read only programs Acknowl- edge message at once Pos. acknow. of end messages File transfer Default value: All bits 0 Active: On POWER ON Bit 3 Bit 3=1 The [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Execution from external 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5148 01000110 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5149 01001100 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5150 01010010 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5151 01011111 These machine data are valid only for ”Execution from [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5152 00010001 This machine data is valid only for ”Execution from external” via the computer link interface. In this byte, the ”Location receiver” is entered. The specification ”Location receiver” defines the inter[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5156 to 5182 Coupled motion combination Default value: All bits 0 The definition of this coupled axis combination defines which coupled axis pairings form a coupled axis combination and how the coupled motion is performed (cou[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) Two bits are assigned to every coupled axis pairing in every coupled axis combination. 5 a. 4 3 a. 2 1 a. 0 7 a. 6 5 a. 4 3 a. 2 G 151 5158 5157 5156 G 152 5161 5160 5159 G 153 5164 5163 5162 G 154 5167 5166 5165 NC MD G 155 5170 5169 5168 G 156 5173 5172 [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5185 negative positive Exact stop on change from G64 to G00 Angle offset for thread cutting (as from SW 5.7) Default value: 0 Active: NC Stop Bit 0 V S G64 G00 V S G64 G00 NC generates NC generates "coarse" exact sto[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5186 Fast block change (up to SW 2) G176 active (up to SW 3) Axis conv. spindle conv. active (as from SW 2) Several block skip levels (as from SW 2) Program coordina- tion (as from SW 2) Default value: 0 Active: In the block p[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) The function ”Automatic saving of part programs on hard disk” can be activated with no / yes in the machine area ”Automatic” via program modification and toggle field ”Automatic save”. Activation of the function ”Automatic saving of part prog[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.1 General MD bits (general bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 5198 Compensa- tion beyond working area (from SW 5.03.57) Block definition from PLC (as from SW 4) Extended overstore (as from SW 4) Jerk IPO Ref. point synch. via G74 Default value: 0 Bit 7 Bit 7=1 Enables compensation beyond[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 520* Spindle override active for thread cutting No M19 abort on RESET M19 with axis movement M19 oriented spindle stop Speed in 0.1 rev/ min units Encoder available Actual value [...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 2 Bit 2=1 Must be set when a function calling for a spindle encoder is required, e.g. • G33 / 34 / 35 (Thread cutting) • G 95 (Feedrate per revolution) • G 96 (Constant cutting speed) • G 97 (Freeze spindle speed) • M 19 (Oriented sp[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 521* Spindle available No spindle zero speed with M03 and Reset New S value after gear acknow. Switch off C axis mode on RESET (as from SW 2) No measuring circuit monitoring Ramp-up as C axis (as from SW 4) Setpoint sign cha[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 3 If the bit is set , no measuring circuit monitoring is performed. Examples for measuring circuit monitoring: • Check for encoder line breakage • Check for contamination, if the encoder has a signal for contamination or if the amplitude c[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) • Control mode The last drift compensation value to be derived is also maintained in control mode (M3 / M4 / M5). • C axis mode The NC axis drift machine data MD 272* applies here; the compensation calculated by the function ”Automatic drift[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Bit 2=1 The control ignores multiple assignment of different spindles to the same digital setpoint output on runup. The control checks cyclically that the spindles do not access the setpoint output at the same time. If they do, reset alarm 2016, &[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 523* Sign inversion setpoint master / slave (as from SW 4.4) Controller output controls master (as from SW 4.4) Controller output controls slave (as from SW 4.4) Master- slave oper- ation after Power On (as from SW 4.4) Posi[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Following spindle-specific machine data bits 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 525* Test bit compensa- tory controller Position overwrite permissible Coupling factor switchover permissible Reconfig. permissible Spindle can be FS The following bits only apply[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 526* Synchroni- zation of tooth pitch (as from SW 6) Block change when syn- chronization achieved Suppres- sion of accel. limit. Block change with synchro- nism fine Reserved Reserved Bit 7=1 The synchronization path of foll[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) Partial setpoint Partial actual value Synchronism fine window Block change on 1 signal Block change on 0 signal T delay t V FA T delay delay (derived from the time constant of the parallel model) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 527* Include tool length com[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) These bits only affect following spindles and are active immediately Bit 0-7 Switchover bit for emergency retraction Bit 0-7=1 The corresponding bit in the output byte of the mixed I / O module is switched from the normal state to the inverted sta[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.2 Spindle-specific MD bits (spindle bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 530* EMERG. retraction when generator speed threshold no met 1) EMERG. retraction when DC link voltage warning threshold not met 1) EMERG. retraction threshold FA / FS 1) Spindle-specific sources for retraction. Bit 2 Bit 2=[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 540* No transform- ation deselect on RESET F value in m/min Spindle setpoint output (S analog) G functions to PLC Aux. functions to PLC Default value MD 840C (T) 840C (M) 540[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) Bit 0 Bit 0 = 0 Inhibits auxiliary function output to the PLC Auxiliary functions are: M, S, T, H, D. Use is recommended for computational channels. For output of the programmed F value to the PLC, see NC MD 544*, bit 0. Note: In machining chann[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 544* F H D T S M No F value output to PLC Output of auxiliary functions in BCD Default value: All 0 Active: In the next block Bit 7-2 Bit 7-2=1 The auxiliary function is output to the PLC in BCD. Bit 2 may not be set to 1 [...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) Exam- ple a Exam- ple b Exam- ple c Exam- ple d Bit patterns for bits... 7654320 Description No output of auxiliary functions 0000000 All auxiliary functions are collected and the last is output following NC START 1111110 All auxiliary functions[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 548* 550* 552* Name of the abscissa (horizontal axis) (same code as for axis definition) Name of the ordinate (perpendicular axis) (same code as for axis definition) Name of the applicate (vertical axis) (same code as for [...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) With SINUMERIK 840C, the initial plane is defined in NC MD 110*. In NC MDs 548*, 550* and 552* you define to which axes the radius compensation and/or length compensation is to apply when the NC is switched on. In NC MD 548* and 550* you define [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) MD 550* 2nd axis 1st axis MD 548* 3rd axis MD 552* G17 G18 G19 PLANE G17 G18 G19 Axis No. 1 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 1 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 554* Axis with constant cutting speed G96 Default value: All 0 Active: When the function is reprogrammed The numbe[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.3 Channel-specific MD bits 1 (channel bits) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 558* Autom. refresh when changing the param. block of a mode group axis (from SW 6.1) Supplement axis after block search Default value: 0 Bit 0 Bit 0 = 1 The "3D interpolation" option must be programmed. F[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 08.96 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 560* Act.-value display modulo 360 deg. Automatic direction recog. on referencing Software limit switches active NC start although ref. pt. not reached Rounding for rotary a[...]

08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) Bit 4 The program can be started with NC START without approach to the reference point of this axis. Bit 3 of NC MD 5004 can be used to indicate whether reference point approach is required prior to program start; this bit applies to all axes and c[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 08.96 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 564* Axis exists Axis type Rotary axis Division axis Actual values division- related Actual value sign change Setpoint sign change Ref. point appr. in neg. direction Default value MD T M 5640 1000 0010 1000 0010 5641 1[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) Bit 3 The actual value (actual position display) is converted into division positions. A division position < 1 is not possible (applies to both rotary and linear axes). The actual value display in the Service data is not converted into division [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) The axis name must be defined according to the table. Example: 0000 0010=Z 0001 1001=Q1 Bit No. Extended address (address number) Code: blank = 0000 1 = 0001 2 = 0010 3 = 0011 4 = 0100 5 = 0101 6 = 0110 7 = 0111 8 = 1000 9 = 1001 10 = 1010 11 = 101[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 572* Traverse rotary axis modulo 360 deg. TO mirroring for transverse axis Modulo 360° prog. of rotary axis Transverse axis Axes without TO on PRESET Default value: MD 572 = 0000 1010 only on the 840C; otherwise, all [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) Bit 4 Bit 4=1 To set a traversing path and direction with G90 programming which corresponds to the program. The control behaves according to the G function programmed: G91: No modulo 360° calculation. The current ZO and TO are added to the program[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC-MD 576* 6 1) 5 1) 4321 Axis disabled for channel Default: All 0 Bit 3, 2, 1, 0 The channel for which a bit is set cannot traverse the axis. Alarm 3014 (”Axis disabled in channel”) is displayed in the event of an error[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 588* Switch over output bit 7 on emergency retraction Switch over output bit 6 on emergency retraction Switch over output bit 5 on emergency retraction Switch over output bit 4 on emergency retraction Switch over outpu[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.4 Axis-specific MD bits 1 (axial bits 1) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 592* ESR drive- autonomous 1) ESR controlled by the NC 1) Trigger alarm + mode group stop on error 1) Determining axis-specific responses (axis was the source of the response). Internal axis- specific responses Bit 2 B[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.6.5 Leadscrew error compensation bits (compensation flags) 6.6.5 Leadscrew error compensation bits (compensation flags) 0 MD No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Bit No. yes/no + / – 6000 C point 4 yes/no + / – C point 3 yes/no + / – C point 2 yes/no + / – C point 1 yes/no + / – 6001 C point 8 yes/n[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.6 Channel-specific MD bits 2 6.6.6 Channel-specific MD bits 2 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 9000 to 9005 Axis 8 Axis 7 Axis 6 Axis 5 Axis 4 Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 1 9020 to 9025 Axis 16 Axis 15 Axis 14 Axis 13 Axis 12 Axis 11 Axis 10 Axis 9 9040 to 9045 Axis 24 Axis 23 Axis 22 Axis 21 Axis 20 Axis 1[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 10.94 6.6.6 Channel-specific MD bits 2 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 914* Channel with FIFO (up to SW2) Default value: all bits default to 0 Bit 0 Bit 0=0 Channel without FIFO Bit 0=1 Channel with FIFO Active: On warm restart / Power On If FIFO is selected for the four MDs only once, the entire storage sp[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.6.6 Channel-specific MD bits 2 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 920* Emergency Stop triggers retraction 1) Mode Group Stop triggers retraction 1) Bit 1 Bit 1=1 Emergency Stop triggers a retraction. Bit 1=0 Emergency Stop does not trigger a retraction. Bit 0 Bit 0=1 Mode Group Stop triggers a retracti[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) SW prelimit switch 1100* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 20 000 - 99 999 999 99 999 999 units (MS) Active at once Defines the distance at which the braking operation is to be prematurely begun [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Division reference dimension 1108* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 units (MS) Active at once Note: The rotary axis has a defaulted internal reference dimension of 360 degrees in accordance with the input resolution. [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) f: Pulse multiplication EXE/611D/HMS 1st measuring system 1116* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 128 1) 512 2) – Active on Power On Warm restart MD 1116* is used to set the multiplication factor for the actual position pulses [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Switch over current setpoint 1 ) 1144* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 60 60 1 2) 999 0.1 % of max. current setpoint Active on NC Stop Move against fixed stop Current setpoint which is to take effect as soon as speed control mode s[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Feedforward control factor 4th - 7th parameter set 3) 1184*- 1196* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 +0 1 000 0.1% Active on NC Stop This MD has the same meaning as MD 312*, see also functional description of parameter set switchov[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) u: Impulses variable incremental weighting 2nd measuring system 1) 1208* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 65000 1) 9999 9999 2) – Active on Power On Active: After Power On Applies to feed axes only. See MD 364*, 368*. v: Traver[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Servo enable switch-off delay 1224* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 0 1 000 ms Active on NC Stop The speed enable (servo enable) on the servo loop is revoked after the set delay time has elapsed. The servo enable is available o[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Compensation time constant quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and SW 3) 1236* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 0.1 ms Active on NC Stop 1st compensation time constant 3) 1236* Default value Lower input limit Upper input li[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Filter time constant acceleration determination for quadrant error compensation (as from SW 4) 1256* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 60 0 16 000 1 ms Active on NC Stop This value is usually not altered by the user. The value should[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Following error threshold for detecting the fixed stop (as from SW 3) 1280* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 16 000 units (MS) 1 000 0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop Following error increase thresho[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Motor current on equilibration (as from SW 3) 1292* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 -70 -700 (as from SW 4) 70 700 (as from SW 4) 0.1 % of the power section current Active on NC Stop MD 1292* is used to define the value of an add[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Servo gain factor 5th parameter set (as from SW 4) 1312* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 666 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01s -1 Active on NC Stop These MD have the same meaning as MD 252*, see also ”Functional Descriptions[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Servo gain factor 7th parameter set (as from SW 4) 1328* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 666 0 10 000 80 000 (as from SW 5) 0.01s -1 Active on NC Stop These MD have the same meaning as MD 252*, see also ”Functional Descriptions[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Torque distribution torque compensation controller (SW 4.4 and higher) 1344* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 984 ‰ Active on NC Stop With MD 1344*, the input variables of the torque compensation controller are weighted to p[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Measuring time 1 (neural QEC only) (as from SW 4) 1372* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 600 1 9999 9999 % of MD 1236* Active on NC Stop Measuring time 2 (neural QEC only) (as from SW 4) 1376* Default value Lower input limit Upper i[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Measuring circuit assignment 2nd measuring system (as from SW 2) 1388* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 5030000 analog (as from SW 2) 15021000 (as from SW 3) 30021000 (as from SW 5) – Active on Power On Active: After POWER ON.[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) D component compensatory controller 1428* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 Active on NC Stop These machine data are only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". Together with the installed test functi[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Tolerance range synchronism coarse 1440* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 16 000 99999999 (SW 5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) Active on NC Stop This machine data is only used for the functionality "Electronic gearbox". D[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) If the calculated setpoint speed/setpoint acceleration of the following axis is greater than the defined values, the corresponding interface signals are set at the PLC interface. If, for example, 50 is entered in MD 276* as the acceleration value, inter[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Application: A gearbox grouping can be configured with the G401 command. If the type of link has not been defined in the G401 command, the default value from MD 1456* is taken. Example: G401 X Y Z X, Y: leading axes, Z: following axis, no link type. If &q[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Exact stop limit fine 2nd - 8th parameter set 1568*- 1592* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 +0 16 000 units (MS) 10 +0 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop These MD have the same meaning as MD 208*, see also[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7 Axis-specific MD 2 (axial data 2) Time constant parallel model 2nd - 8th parameter set (as from SW 4) 1708*- 1732* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 6 000 0 16 000 0.01 ms Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 1432*, see also ”Functional Descriptions[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 1800* Position control resolution Display resolution Code table for resolution Metric (Degrees) Inches (Degrees) 0100 = Standard machine data NC MD 5002 NC MD 1800* NC MD 18[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. NC MD 1804* Adaptation (as from SW 2) Quadrant error comp- ensation (as from SW 2) Axis can travel against fixed stop (as from SW 3) Sensor signal PLC fixed stop (as from SW 3) Monitoring clamping tolerance act. (as from SW [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.01 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) The derived following error difference is always evaluated against the actual set speed in order to derive a compensation value across the total velocity range of an axis. Otherwise a compensation proportional to the velocity would not be possible [...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Description of function: The absolute position is made up of • 16 bits absolute revolution information (number of revolutions), • 14 bits resolution within one revolution, • 7 bits fine resolution, i.e. that 2 16 = 65536 encoder resolutions c[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) If the absolute position is negative, one revolution is added to the rest of the modulo calculation. This means that after control run-up, a position between 0 and 360° is always displayed in the basic actual value display and the service display.[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Bit 4 Bit 4=1 Measuring system with distance-coded reference marks. Standard value: Bit 0-4 = 0 Changes in bits 2-3 are actuated on the next reference point approach in bit 4 after POWER ON. When the SIPOS / Endat absolute encoder is used, the foll[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Special case ”parking axis” The axial interface signal ”Parking axis” also causes the interface signal ”Reference point reached” to be deleted for an axis with SIPOS / Endat absolute encoder. When bit 3 of MD 1808* is set, a new referen[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Bit 6 Torque compensation controller output affects master Bit 6=1 The output of the torque compensation controller is connected with bits 5 and 6. It can either affect the speed setpoint of the slave (bit 5 = 1 only), the master (bit 6 = 1 only) o[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 1820* Contour monitoring not active Pulse encoder monitoring on No. of encoder pulses (611D) 2nd meas. system (as from SW 3) Second meas. system with external zero mark (as from SW 3) No. of encoder pulses (611D) 1st meas. sy[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 1824* Effect of LEC on mea- suring systems 00=first 01=second 10=both 11=both Setting of reference dimension allowed Sign change actual value 2 (as from SW 2) Set abso- lute system to reference dimension (as from SW 3) Multip[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 1828* Linear scale (as from SW 6.3) Extended parameter set switch- over (as from SW 4) NC MD 1828* bit 1: This bit is only used for linear axes with ENDAT absolute encoders. Bit 1 Bit 1=1 Linear scale not available. Maximum t[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 1844* Vel. limitation ELG following axes (as from SW 6) Test bit compensa- tory controller LINK ON after POWER ON Position overwrite permissible Link factor switchover permissible Reconfig. permissible Axis can be FA The foll[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) 76543210 Bit No. NC MD 1848* Synchroni- zation in tooth pitch (as from SW 6) Block change after position reached (as from SW 5) Block change when synchroniz. achieved Division- related FA overlay Suppres- sion of accel. limit. Block change with syn[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) Bit 3 "Suppression of acceleration limitation" Bit 3=1 "Acceleration limitation not active" With LINK ACTIVE, the acceleration of the following axis is not limited by the control but is output directly, as determined by leading [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.7.1 Axis-specific MD bits 2 (axial bits 2) The following bits are defined for the following axes. They are then active for the following axis and the leading axes activated in the GI grouping. The above values are included when calculating the synchronous position (G403). Bit 5 Bit 5=1 Incl[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.8 MDs for multi-channel display 6.8 MDs for multi-channel display MDs for screen Multiple-channel display 20440- 20419 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit 0 0 4 (as from SW 4: 6) – Active on Warm restart Reserved for customer UMS. Multiple-channel display 20420- 20439 Defaul[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Number of teeth motor as from SW 4 1st to 8th parameter set 2400*- 2407* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 999 999 – Active on Power On Number of teeth spindle as from SW 4 1st to 8th paramet[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Zero mark correction + as from SW 4 5th to 8th parameter set 2430*- 2433* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 - 999 999 999 999 16 000 (as from SW 4.4) units (MS) Active on NC Stop Zero mark correction - as from SW 4 1st to 8 th param[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover MDs for acceleration characteristic for spindles Speed lim. acc. adapt. as from SW 4 1st to 8th parameter set 2471*- 2478* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 99 999 +0 99 999 rpm/or 0.1 rpm Active on NC Stop Acceleration adaptation fac[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover D component comp. contr. 2nd - 8th par. set as from SW 4 2508*- 2514* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 16 000 1 Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 489*, see also ”Functional Descriptions: Parameter set switcho[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Emergency retraction threshold 2nd - 8th parameter as from SW 4 2560*- 2566* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 400 0 16 000 99 999 999 (SW5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 493*, see also [...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Torque distr. torque comp. controller 1) 2702* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 984 ‰ Active on Power On With MD 2702*, the input variables of the torque compensation controller are weighted to permit a parameterizable torque[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Number of teeth motor 2) 1st par. set to 8th par. set 3032*- 3060* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 11 999 999 99 999 999 (as from SW 4.4) – Active on Power On Number of teeth spindle 2) 1st par. set to 8th par. set 3064*- 3092* De[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Tol. band for synchr. "fine" 2nd - 8th parameter set as from SW 4 3216*- 3240* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 40 0 16 000 99 999 999 (SW 5.4 and higher) 1 unit (MS) Active on RESET These MD have the same meaning as MD 143[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.9 MDs for parameter set switchover Maximum velocity (as from SW 6) 3392*- 3416* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 000 Active on NC Stop See also Functional Descriptions: Collision monitoring. Compensation time constant for contour monitoring 3420* (from SW 6.3) [...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring Motion axis X coordinate (as from SW 6) 3800* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 Axis no. POWER ON The motion axes are assigned to the protection zone in the protection-zone-specific machine data[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring Protection zone reference point vector FP1 Y coordinate (as from SW 6) 3816* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 999 MS POWER ON Protection zone reference point vector FP1 Z coordinate (as from SW 6) 3820* Default value Lower i[...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring Protection dimensions in 3 coordinates not equal to 0: Three-dimensional monitoring Definition: Two-dimensional protection zone to be mutually monitored for collision must be in the same plane. Assigned MCS (as from SW 6) 3840* Default value Lower input limi[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring 3880* (as from SW 6) No monitoring of PZ 8 No monitoring of PZ 7 No monitoring of PZ 6 No monitoring of PZ 5 No monitoring of PZ 4 No monitoring of PZ 3 No monitoring of PZ 2 No monitoring of PZ 1 MD No. Bit No. 76543210 3884* (as from SW 6) No monitoring of[...]

04.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring r1: Load no. of revolutions 1) 3900* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 Active r2: Motor no. of revolutions 1) 3904* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 Active I: Spindle pitch or g: Grating constant 1) 3908* Defa[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.9.1 MDs for collision monitoring The setpoint position of the following axis is checked in every IPO cycle to establish whether it is in the reduction range. The system is designed such that several IPO cycles elapse before changes to the setpoints of a leading axis are output to the setpoi[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration Size of UMS memory 1) 60000 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 256 KB 0 960 or 2 760 KB 2 760 KB (as from SW 4.4) 4 KB/8 KB Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" With the introd[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration Load MS drive software (as from SW 6) 60003 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 – POWER ON If MD 60003 and / or 60004 are set to 1 the memory for the drive software is automatically set to 192 / 384 Kbytes (compatible memo[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration Number of parameters per tool as from SW 4 60006 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 0 10 32 1 TO Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" 819 tools with 10 parameters each corresponds to 32760 bytes = approx. 32 KB memor[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration Memory configuration of NC module as from SW 4 60011 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 Byte Active after SK "Reconfigure memory" Machine data reserved by the system. Load cap. of NC CPU (as from SW 5) 60012 Default v[...]

08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.10 MDs for flexible memory configuration Memory for extended overstore (channel 1) (as from SW 5) 61020 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 0 1 approx. 50 KB Active Power On Memory for extended overstore (channel 2) (as from SW 5) 61021 Default value Lower input limit [...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 04.96 6.11 Safety Integrated (SI) data 6.11 Safety Integrated (SI) data The SINUMERIK Safety Integrated function is an option. The Safety Integrated machine and service data are described in the documentation SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (Description of Functions). 6–216 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rig[...]

07.97 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) 6.12 Setting data 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) All setting data (SD) take effect immediately (without POWER ON). If program processing is in progress, they become active in the next block if they have been changed with G functions in the part program. Breakdow[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Zero offsets (ZO) G54 1st settable zero offset (coarse + fine) G55 2nd settable zero offset (coarse + fine) G56 3rd settable zero offset (coarse + fine) G57 4th settable zero offset (coarse + fine) Suppression with G53 (see also NC MD 5007 bit 1) Suppression wit[...]

08.96 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) R parameters 700 parameters per channel are available for the whole system and 600 central parameters: parameters R0 to R699 are channel-specific, parameters R700 to R1299 apply to all channels. Structure and application of R parameters: Channel 1 to channel 4 R[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 09.95 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) R parameter assignment R0 – R49: Typical application per channel : Input of cycles and subroutines. R50 – R99: Typical application per channel : For calculations within cycles and subroutines. The same local parameters may be used for nested subroutines. Whe[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) General setting data Dry run feedrate 0 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 00 1072 0000 9999 9999 (as from SW 5) 1 000 units/min Active on – If ”Dry run feedrate” is selected on the control, the tool path feedrate selected is the dry r[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 12.93 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) M version: If the control is initialized for milling , the actual value coupling between the spindle speed actual value and feed setpoint is direction dependent. If the traversing direction of the feed axis is to be altered, then the spindle direction of rotatio[...]

09.95 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) INC Variable 9 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 9 999.9999 1) 16 000 2) – Active on – Incremental dimension INC Variable The axis in question is traversed by this amount when the direction key (+ or -) is pressed. Scale factor 200[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 08.96 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) The setting data can be written from a part program under "Program control" using the command @410 or from the PLC. A larger value can be written as the available block memory. The NC however still predecodes no more than the stated number of blocks. I[...]

12.93 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Scale centre NC 312* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 – 99 999.999 + 99 999.999 mm or inches Active on – The scale centre defines where the reference point for the alteration of the programmed axis positions using the scale factor li[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Spindle-specific setting data Programmable spindle speed limitation for G96 401* Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 99 999 0.1 rev/min Active on – The spindle speed is limited at constant cutting speed (G96) by the programmed spindle s[...]

09.01 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Units The unit of the entered values is defined in bit 3 of MD 520*: Bit 3 = 0: Unit rev / min Bit 3 = 1: Unit 0.1 rev / min Note The maximum spindle speed value is determined by the minimum of the following values: • MD 403* to 410* ”Maximum speed” per ge[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 07.97 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Axial bits 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. SD MD 560* Scale factor active on machine Rapid override not active Feedrate override not active Bit 2 The scale factor (G51) is active during machining. Bit 1 Override switch for rapid traverse no longer active in the axis in [...]

01.99 6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Axis converter setting data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. SD 626* to 699* Axis converter The setting data are stored in binary format as follows. SD 626* 1st programmed axis channel- specific SD 628* 1st machine axis channel- specific SD 630* . . . 2nd programmed axis[...]

6 NC Machine Data (NC MD), NC Setting Data (NC SD) 01.99 6.12.1 NC setting data (NC SD) Setting data for the additive protection zone adaptation (as from SW 6) The values for the coordination of the dynamic protection zone adaptation are to be entered in the following setting data bits: SD No. Description Default value Maximum input value Reference[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1 611A main spindle drive machine data (MSD MD) (SW 3) 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1 611A main spindle drive machine data (MSD MD) (SW 3) 7.1.1 MSD MD input (SW 3) The main spindle drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the main spindle drives and the machine too[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) DC link voltage 6 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – V Active at once Display machine data for the present DC link voltage. Motor current 7 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – A Active at once D[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Status of binary inputs 11 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – Hex Active at once Display machine data for the status of the binary inputs. Value table: Bit 0 Not assigned Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Image terminal 663 (module-specific pul[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Rounding degree speed setpoint 19 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 30 – Active at once Input of parameter setting for a PT2 filter (low-pass) in the speed setpoint channel. The low- pass filter is inserted on the output side of the ra[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) n x for n act < n x message motor 1 23 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 6 000 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min Active at once Input of response value for monitoring of the PLC status message n act < n x (see also MD 241). Tolerance band [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Integral-action time speed controller motor 1 32 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 20 5 6 000 ms Active at once Input of integral-action time (t N ) for the speed controller. The speed controller has a PI function which can be set separately[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Hysteresis MD 37 motor 1 38 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 500 rev/min Active at once Input of hysteresis for machine data MD 37 (switchover speed for motor encoder evaluation). 1st torque limiting value motor 1 39 Default value Lowe[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Hysteresis MD 42 motor 1 43 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 20 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min Active at once Input of hysteresis for the switchover speed set in machine data MD 42 (see also MD 39). Selection torque setpoint smoothing motors[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Switching speed from M d1 to M d2 motor 1 50 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4 x rated motor speed 0 Maximum motor speed rev/min Active at once Input of speed at which switchover from the 1st torque limit (MD 39) to the 2nd torque limit (M[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Maximum motor temperature motor 1 63 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 170 °C Active at once Input of maximum motor temperature. The value entered can be lower than the maximum temperature value calculated via the motor c[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Shift factor DAC2 73 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 15 – Active at once Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. The DACs are configured in the course of the drive servo start-up procedure for diagnostic pu[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Input of shift factor DAC1 for analog output. The top 8 bits from a 16-bit wide memory location are output. This machine data specifies how often the value must be shifted to the left beforehand. A shift by one position corresponds to a multiplication by 2, i.e. [...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor code number motor 1 96 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 101 99 332 – Active on Power On Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered as[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. Rated speed Rated power Rated current No-load current Code number n rated in rev/min P rated in kW rated in A (for T =100 K) 0 in A (for T =100 K) 1PH6163-4NF0- x 1500 30.0 72.5 33.3 125 1PH6163-4NF4- x 1500 30.0 86.0 40.3 126 1PH6163-4NG4- x 2000 38.0 [...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. Rated speed Rated power Rated current No-load current Code number n rated in rev/min P rated in kW rated in A (for T =100 K) 0 in A (for T =100 K) 1PH6206-4NB8- D 1250 32.0 73.0 49.0 211 DMR160.80.6. RIF 200 12.6 60.0 36.4 212 DMR160.80.6. rif 1300 12.6[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Boot 97 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0002 Hex Active at once Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered as appropriate via the [...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Grading torque setpoint filter motor 1 104 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.00 0.10 10.00 – Active at once Input of filter quality for the bandstop in the torque setpoint channel (see MD 117). 1.00: Basis quality=1 Correction P-gain cur[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Switchover speed current controller adaptation motor 1 120 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units MD 172 500 10 000 rev/min Active at once Input of switchover speed for the current controller adaptation. The phase current controller gain is adapt[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor moment of inertia motor 1 159 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0.002 32.000 kgm 2 Active on Power On Input of motor moment of inertia as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterizat[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor no-load voltage motor 1 165 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500.0 V Active on Power On Input of motor no-load voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using mac[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Magnetizing reactance motor 1 171 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 65 535 m Active on Power On Input of magnetizing reactance as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using ma[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Gain factor X h -characteristic motor 1 175 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 300 % Active on Power On Input of gain factor (X h2 / X h1 ) of the X h characteristic (magnetizing reactance) as specified on the motor data [...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Selection min/max memory 179 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0002 Hex Active at once This function allows variables to be monitored in the software. The address of the monitored variable is entered in machine data "Address o[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Minimum value min/max memory 182 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 – Hex Active at once Output of minimum value of a previously defined variable (see MD 181). The value is displayed in hexadecimal format. Maximum value min/max m[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Hysteresis monitoring 1 189 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0001 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of hysteresis of threshold value 1 of address 1 to be monitored for variable relay function 1. Address for monitoring 2 190 Default value L[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Lower adaptation speed motor 1 195 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 000 0 (Max. speed) –2 rev/min Active at once Input of lower adaptation speed for the speed controller. The speed controller machine data can be adapted, i.e. the P gain[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Reduction factor reset time motor 1 202 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 1 200 % Active at once Input of reset time reduction factor for the upper adaptation speed. This machine data contains the multiplication factor for the reset time[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Selection transient recorder 206 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex Active at once This machine data is provided to activate the transient recorder function with which two signals can be recorded in a 1 ms cycle for a limit[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Address for stop condition 210 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of address for the variable which is significant for stopping the recording (see also MD 206). Threshold for stop condition 211 Default [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Shift factor signal 2 216 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 15 – Active at once Input of shift factor for signal 2 (see also MD 206). The top 8 bits from a 16-bit wide memory location are output. This machine data specifies how often t[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor rated voltage motor 2 222 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 500.0 V Active on Power On Input of motor rated voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Rotor resistance cold motor 2 228 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 0 32 767 m Active on Power On Input of rotor resistance (cold) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using [...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Speed at start of field weakening motor 2 233 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Depends on motor 100 6 000 rev/min Active on Power On Input of speed at which field weakening starts as specified on the motor data sheet (non- Siemens motor) or[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor code number motor 2 238 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 101 99 332 – Active on Power On Note: This machine data is not included in the machine data lists. During start-up in machine data dialog, the machine data is set or altered a[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Description of user-programmable messages: •| n act | < n min (function no. 1) The PLC status message is set when | n act | < n min . Settable in MD 21. • Ramp-up complete (function no. 2) The PLC status message is set when the actual speed value corres[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Programmable message 2 242 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 1 20 – Active at once A function can be assigned to programmable message 2 in this machine data. The default setting corresponds to M d > M dx (see MD 241 for other settings[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Control word message 247 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once By setting bits 0 to 5, it is possible to invert the function of the appropriate messages (MD 241 to MD 246). In bits 8 and 9, it is possible to cho[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Display of active functions 2 255 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – Hex Active at once Display of high word in drive control word Value table: Bit 0-2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10-11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) n min for n act < n min message motor 2 260 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 12 0 Rated speed rev/min Active at once Input of response value for monitoring of the PLC status message n act < n min (see also MD 241). Creep speed pulse s[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) P-gain speed controller motor 2 265 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 32.0 1.0 120.0 – Active at once Input of P gain (K p ) for the speed controller. The speed controller has a PI function which can be set separately for eight gear stages[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) With a setting of, for example, 100 %, the rated torque acts as the torque limit up to rated speed. At speeds above the rated value, the torque limit curve drops in proportion to 1/n so that the rated output is reached in each case. MD 270 - MD 273, MD 47 and MD [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Hysteresis MD 274 motor 2 275 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 50 0 Rated speed rev/min Active at once Input of hysteresis for the cut-in speed set in machine data MD 274. Frequency torque setpoint filter motor 2 276 Default value Lower inp[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Type torque setpoint filter motor 2 281 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 0001 Hex Active at once The filter type is selected in this machine data (see MD 280). 0: Bandstop characteristic 1: Low-pass characteristic Lower adaptation[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Integral-action time upper adaptation speed motor 2 288 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 80 5 6 000 ms Active at once Input of integral-action time for the upper adaptation speed. This machine data contains the integral-action time at speed[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Phase current controller gain n 4 x gain set in MD 278 MD 278 MD 337 MD 292 Selection adaption speed controller motor 2 293 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 7 – Active at once Input of activation point for speed controller adaption. T[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.1.2 MSD MD (data description - SW 3) Selection I/f control 313 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 Hex Active at once The I/f control diagnosis aid is activated by entering bit 0 = 1. This control is used to check encoder faults. A variable speed (without encoder evaluation[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2 611D feed drive machine data (FDD MD) (SW 3) 7.2 611D feed drive machine data (SW 3) 7.2.1 FDD MD input (SW 3) The feed drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the feed drives and the machine tool. If no setting values are specified by the machine manufacturer or the user, then[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Monitoring cycle 1002 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 000 4 000 100 000 µ s Active on Power On The interrupt clock cycle is used for high-priority monitoring purposes. Note: The input value for the clock cycle must be a whole multiple[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) f PBM in Hz T PBM in µ s 2666.6.... 375.0* 2782.6.... 359.375 2909.0.... 343.75 3047.6.... 328.125 3200 312.5* 3368.4.... 296.875 3555.5.... 281.25 3764.7.... 265.625 4000 250.0* 4266.6.... 234.375 4571.4.... 218.75 4923.0.... 203.125 5333.3.... 187.5* 5818.1...[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Motor code number 1102 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 65 535 – Active on Power On Input of motor order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens motors). This number is transferred to the drive in the form of a motor [...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Order No. Rated speed Motor code no. n rated in rev / min 1FT6132-6AF7X-XXXX 3000 1212 1FT6061-6AH7X-XXXX 4500 1301 1FT6062-6AH7X-XXXX 4500 1302 1FT6064-6AH7X-XXXX 4500 1303 1FT6081-8AH7X-XXXX 4500 1304 1FT6082-8AH7X-XXXX 4500 1305 1FT6084-8AH7X-XXXX 4500 1306 1F[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Derating (reduction) characteristics can be incorporated via this machine data, e.g. derating as a function of the pulse frequency (MD 1100). f PBM in kHz 111,25 100 55 3,2 8 2 % MD 1105 , MD 1191 = MD 1107 8 x 2 x MD1118 l limit power section (MD 1108) = min 800[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Power section code 1106 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 00FF Hex Active on Power On When the power section order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens power sections) is input during initial start-up, it is con[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Limit current power section 1108 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200 1 500 A Active on Power On Input of maximum thermally permissible current of power section. The input is an RMS value. This machine data is automatically parameterized fo[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Torque constant 1113 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 5 0.1 5 Nm/A Active on Power On Input of torque constant as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) P-gain current controller 1120 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 000 V/A Active at once Input of proportional gain of current controller or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code number" (MD 1102). It defi[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Type current setpoint filter 1201 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units Low-pass Low-pass Band-stop – Active at once Input of configuration of 4 current setpoint filters. Band-stop and low-pass filters are available. The adjustable filter para[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: • Current setpoint filter 1 is preset to the current controller sampling time MD 1000 = 125 µ s for damping of the encoder torsional natural frequency. Natural frequency current setpoint filter 2 1204 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Uni[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Natural frequency current setpoint filter 4 1208 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2 low-pass). An entry of < 10 Hz as the natural frequency of the lo[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 1211 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 1 000 Hz Active at once Input of 3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201. Note: Whe[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 1214 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500 0 1 000 Hz Active at once Input of 3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 2 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 and MD 1201. Note: Whe[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Block frequency current setpoint filter 4 1219 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 999.0 1 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of block frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (band-stop). When block frequencies of < 10 Hz are input, the filt[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: The velocity of a feed axis is matched with NC-MD 2560 (maximum axis velocity). The motor speed which corresponds to this maximum value must be entered in drive-MD 1401. Allowance is made for the spindle pitch plus any existing gear ratios, etc. in the rela[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: Under normal circumstances, shutdown is implemented sequentially on the drive and servo sides, with variously adjustable timers (NC-MD 156, NC-MD 12240) and, in the event of a fault, only on the drive side with timer MD 1404. Monitoring speed motor 1405 Def[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Integral-action time speed controller 1409 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 10 0 500 ms Active at once Input of integral-action time of speed control loop in the lower speed range (N < lower speed threshold MD 1411). The integral-action [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Graphic representation: Adaptation of speed controller machine data by means of characteristic n MD 1411 K P , T N MD 1412 MD 1401 MD 1409 MD 1408 MD 1410 MD 1407 Lower speed range with constant P gain/ integral-action time Upper speed range with constant P gain/[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Natural frequency reference model speed control loop 1414 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 8 000 Hz Active at once Input of natural frequency for the "Speed control loop" reference model. The filter is deactivated if a value o[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 12.93 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) n min for n act < n min 1418 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 7 200 rev/min Active at once Input of threshold speed for monitoring purposes; if the actual speed value does not reach the set threshold speed in terms of absolute value,[...]

12.93 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Bit 0 Internal error cannot be concealed Bit 1 Not assigned Bit 2 Measuring circuit error, phase current R Bit 3 Measuring circuit error, phase current S Bit 4 Measuring circuit error, position measuring system motor Bit 5 Measuring circuit error, position measur[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Timer motor temperature alarm 1603 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 240 0 600 s Active at once Input of timer for the motor temperature alarm. When the value set in "Motor temperature warning" (MD 1602) is exceeded, a message is t[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Bit 0 Control unit enable (internal module function), including marking according to MD 1003, bit 5 Bit 1 Image terminal 663 (module-specific pulse suppression IMPFR) Bit 2 Image terminal 63 / 48 of I / RF unit (central drive pulse suppression REIMSP) Bit 3 Sum s[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Speed actual value 1707 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 0000 32 767.0 rev/min Active at once This machine data is used to display the actual speed value and represents the unfiltered actual speed value. Time-synchronous unlatching (s[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.2.2 FDD MD (data description - SW 3) Note: This machine data is calculated only once during ramp-up; its value cannot therefore be changed during operation. CRC diagnosis parameter 1720 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0 FFFF Hex Active at once This machine data is used[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3 611D drive machine data (FDD / MSD - as from SW 4) 7.3 611D drive machine data (FDD/MSD - as from SW 4) 7.3.1 Drive MD input (as from SW 4) The drive machine data are provided for the purpose of matching the drives (FDD / MSD) and the machine tool. If no setting values are specified by the machine[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Table: Possible current and speed controller cycle combinations SIN 840C with 611D controller ... Current controller cycle MD 1000 Speed controller cycle MD 1001 Comments Single-axis performance 125 µ s 125 µ s Default value Single-axis performance 62.5 µ s 62,5 µ[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Configuration structure 1004 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 7FFF Hex Active on Power On Input of the configuration for control structures, speed measuring systems and functionality referred to the SIMODRIVE System 611D. Value table: [...]

08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Encoder phase error compensation 1008 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 - 20.0 20.0 Degrees Active at once With this machine data, a phase error compensation is performed. On unconditioned signal encoders (e.g. ERN 1387), phase errors can occ[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Function switch 1012 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of the configuration for switch-on functionality referred to the SIMODRIVE System 611D. Value table: Bit 0 Ramp-up encoder follow-up 0 = not active 1 =[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Multiturn resolution absolute encoder motor (as from SW 5) 1021 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 4 096 0 65 535 rev/min Active on Power On Number of revolutions of the motor that can be represented Measuring increments of the absolute track moto[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note regarding bit 9: Incorrect parameterization, e.g. not on EQN MD 1011 (configuration actual-value acquisition, indirect measuring system) or MD 1030 (configuration actual-value acquisition, direct measuring system) or obsolete hardware (not suitable for EQN) or no[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Direct servo loop absolute track (SW 5 and higher) 1033 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active on Power On Bit 0 Lighting failed Replace encoder Bit 1 Signal amplitude too small Replace encoder Bit 2 Code connection defective[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Notes: • The pulse frequency can be specified only in the quantization given in the table above. Other frequency inputs are rounded up or down to the next closest table value, e.g. 3150 Hz to 3200 Hz. Calc. dead time current closed-loop 1101 Default value Lower inpu[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor code number 1102 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 65 535 – Active on Power On Input of motor order number (machine-readable product designation for Siemens motors). This number is transferred to the drive in the form of a motor code [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 08.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor table: MSD motors Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. n rated in rev / min 1PH6186-4NF4- x 1500 164 1PH6206-4NE4- x 1250 165 1PH6206-4NF4- x 1500 166 1PH6186-4NB9- x 700 167 1PH6226-4NF4- x 1500 168 1PH6133-4NB8- Y 525 200 1PH6133-4NB8- D 1250 201 1PH6137-4NB8-[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor table: MSD motors Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. n rated in rev / min 1PH2115-6WF4 1500 323 1PH2117-6WF4 1500 324 1PH2118-6WF4 1500 325 1PH2092-4WG4 2000 326 1PH2096-4WG4 2000 327 1PH2123-4WF4 1500 328 1PH2127-4WF4 1500 329 1PH2128-4WF4 1500 330 1PH2143-4W[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 08.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor table: FDD motors Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. n rated in rev / min 1FT6082-XAF7X-XXXX 3000 1207 1FT6084-XAF7X-XXXX 3000 1208 1FT6086-XAF7X-XXXX 3000 1209 1FT6102-8AF7X-XXXX 3000 1210 1FT6105-8AF7X-XXXX 3000 1211 Order no. Rated speed Motor code no. n ra[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor rated current 1103 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 A Active on Power On Input of rated current consumption (RMS value) in operation at rated torque and rated speed as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Format of power section code number: Value table: Code Drive type Current PS Comments 6 MSD 24 / 32 / 32 A 50 A 7 MSD 30 / 40 / 51 A 80 A 8 MSD 45 / 60 / 76 A 120 A 9 MSD 60 / 80 / 102 A 160 A A MSD 85 / 110 / 127 A 200 A B MSD 120 / 150 / 193 A 300 A C MSD 200 / 250 [...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Thermal limit current, power section 1108 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 200.0 1.0 500.0 A Active on Power On Input of maximum thermally permissible current of power section. The input is an RMS value. This machine data is automatically parame[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Number of pole pairs motor 1112 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 4 – Active on Power On Input of number of pole pairs of motor as specified on the motor data sheet (also non-Siemens motor) or through automatic parameterization using machin[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Armature resistance 1115 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 20.0 Active on Power On Input of ohmic resistance of the armature winding (phase value) as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization usin[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Inductance of series reactor 1119 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 65.0 mH Active on Power On A series reactor is usually required for stable operation of the current controller on high-speed special asynchronous motors or low-leakage as[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) cos power factor 1129 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.8 0.0 1.0 Active on Power On cos is required for the calculation of the equivalent circuit diagrams from the data on the rating plate. Note: This machine data only applies to main spindle [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor no-load voltage 1135 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 V Active at once* Input of motor no-load voltage as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor code[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Stator leakage reactance 1139 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 100.0 Active at once* Input of stator leakage reactance as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization using machine data "Motor [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 08.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Upper speed L h characteristic motor 1 1143 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Active on Power On Input of upper speed limit for the L h characteristic (magnetizing inductivity L h ) as specified on the motor data sheet (n[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Breakdown torque reduction factor 1145 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 1 000.0 % Active at once Input of breakdown torque reduction factor as specified on the motor data sheet. The point at which the breakdown torque limit is applied [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) P gain flux controller 1150 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 400.0 0.0 100 000.0 A/Vs Active at once Input of the proportional gain of the flux controller or automatic paramterization (initialization) through the operator action Calculate contro[...]

08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Evaluation torque limit value 1190 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 0 10 000 Nm Active at once This drive machine data does not have any effects on hardware and software. Matching factor servo limiting torque 1191 Default value Lower input l[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Example: Low-pass Low-passes and band-stops are used in damping resonances above and at the limit of stability of the speed control loop (see diagrams below). Specified: Natural frequency 500 Hz with 0.2, 0.5 or 1.0 input 1 10 Log 1k 180 Phase Deg -180 10 kHz 100 500 [...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Specified: Blocking frequency 1 kHz with 500 Hz bandwidth 0 Hz bandwidth numerator (damping) 1 10 Log 1k 10 kHz 20.0 0.0 dB -60.0 100 Blocking frequency 1 10 Log 1k 10 kHz 180 Phase Deg -180 100 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197- AA50 7–101 SINUMERIK 84[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Specified: Blocking frequency 1 kHz, 500 Hz bandwidth and 250 Hz bandwidth numerator (damping) 1 10 Log 1k 10 kHz 20.0 0.0 dB -60.0 100 -5.0 Blocking frequency 1 10 Log 1k 10 kHz 180 Deg -180 100 Type current setpoint filter 1201 Default value Lower input limit Upper [...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 3rd filter Bit 2 0 1 Low-pass (see MD 1206 / 1207) Band-stop (see MD 1216 / 1217 / 1218) 4th filter Bit 3 0 1 Low-pass (see MD 1208 / 1209) Band-stop (see MD 1219 / 1220 / 1221) Note: Before the filter type is configured, the appropriate filter machine data must be in[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Damping current setpoint filter 2 1205 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.0 0.05 5.0 – Active at once Input of damping for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Damping current setpoint filter 4 1209 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1.0 0.05 5.0 – Active at once Input of damping for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 1 1211 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 1 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoin[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 2 1214 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 2 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoin[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 3 1217 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 3 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoin[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Bandwidth current setpoint filter 4 1220 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 500.0 5.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of -3dB bandwidth for current setpoint filter 4 (band-stop). The filter is activated in machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoin[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Breakdown torque limitation 1 / n 2 Power limitation 1 / n Resultant torque limit value MD 1145 Constant torque range Speed MD 1235 Reduction factor MD 1236 with selection of 2nd power limit Additional limitation through MD 1237 in generator operation Torque limitatio[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Generative limitation 1233 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 100.0 % Active at once Input of torque limit for braking operation (generator-mode torque limit). This input value is referred to the maximum motor-mode torque. If the 2nd tor[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 2nd power limit value 1236 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100.0 5.0 100.0 % Active at once The 2nd power limit value entered in MD 1236 acts as a reduction factor referred to the 1st power limit value (MD 1235). It becomes active only if the 2[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Threshold speed-dependent torque setpoint smoothing 1245 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Active at once Input of speed value above which the torque setpoint smoothing function selected in machine data "Type current[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Corner freq. curr. act. val. smooth. 1250 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 100.0 0.0 8 000.0 Hz Active at once Input of -3dB corner frequency f o of cross-current actual value smoothing function (PT1 low- pass) for display purposes. Time constan[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor rated speed 1400 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 1 450.0 0.0 25 000.0 50 000.0 (as from SW 6) rev/min Active on Power On Input of motor rated speed as specified on the motor data sheet (non-Siemens motor) or automatic parameterization usi[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Controller enable n t Case 1 MD 1403 = 0 t I t n Case 2 MD 1403 = X I Motor coasts out Timer pulse suppression 1404 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 100.0/5 000.0 0.0 100 000.0 ms Active at once Input of timer for pulse suppression by drive. In [...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Monitoring speed motor 1405 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 110.0/100.0 100.0 110.0 % Active at once Input as percentage of maximum permissible speed setpoint as limit value for speed setpoint monitoring. Machine data "Speed for max. motor[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) P-gain upper adaptation speed 1408 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0.3 0.0 100 000.0 Nm/s -1 Active at once Input of P-gain of the speed control loop in the upper speed range (n > upper speed threshold in MD 1412) or automatic parameterizati[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Notes: • Setting the reset time to zero deactivates the I-action component for the range which is greater than the machine data "Adaptation upper speed threshold (MD 1412) (see also Note in MD 1409). • MD 1410 is not active when the "Speed controller ada[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Selection adaptation speed controller 1413 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 0 1 – Active at once This machine data allows adaptation of the speed controller machine data to be controlled as a function of speed. Input 0: The adaptation functi[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Damping reference model speed control loop 1415 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 1.0 0.5 5.0 – Active at once Input of damping for the "Speed control loop" reference model. This is a reference model (PT2) for the speed control loop w[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Maximum motor speed set-up mode 1420 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 30.0 0.0 50 000.0 rev/min Active at once Input of maximum motor speed for set-up mode. During set-up, the absolute speed setpoint value is limited to the value specified above[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Symmetr.calc.deadtime I-controller 1425 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 1.0 – Active at once Selection of a filter in the speed feedforward control channel to simulate the calculation dead time of the current control loop. Effective o[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 08.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Torque threshold characteristic for the message M d < M dx . Presently valid torque limit value Threshold torque M breakd. P limit Power limitation M limit M n 1 / n 1 / n 2 The "M d < M dx " message is locked in the active state as long as the "P[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Relation between control word (MD 11004) and control word (MD 11002). MD 1500 Status MD 1500 > 0 MD 1500 > 0 MD 1500=0 Type of 1st filter - Low-pass (MD 1501.0 = 0) Band-stop (MD 1501.0 = 1) Inactive (MD 1501.0 = 0 or 1) Control word MD 11004, bit 11 1 Status wo[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: Before the filter type is configured, the appropriate filter machine data must be input. Time constant speed setpoint filter 1 1502 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 500.0 ms Active at once Input of time constant for speed setpoint [...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Damping speed setpoint filter 1 1507 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.7 0.2 5.0 – Active at once Input of damping for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2 low-pass). The filter is activated via machine data MD 1200 (No. current setpoint filters) a[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Block frequency speed setpoint filter 1 1514 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 500.0 1.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once Input of block frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 and parameterization as simple band-stop filter. The filter is activated via[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: The maximum block frequency input value is limited by the sampling frequency of the servo control (MD 1001) (parameterization error). MD 1514 < 2 x T sampl. speed controller 1 T sampl. (MD 1001) 62.5 µ s 125.0 µ s MD 1514 8000 Hz 4000 Hz = MD 1001 [ s ] Ban[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Example: 5 4 k 20.0 -60.0 5 4 k 180 Phase Deg -180 Log Hz Log Hz fz = 900 Hz fbn = 1800 Hz (Dn = 100%) fbz = 180 Hz (Dz = 10%) fn = 100% dB 5 4 k 20.0 -60.0 5 4 k 180 Phase Deg -180 Log Hz Log Hz fz = 900 Hz fbn = 900 Hz (Dn = 50%) fbz = 180 Hz (Dz = 10%) fn = 100% dB[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) 5 4 k 20.0 -60.0 5 4 k 180 Phase Deg -180 Log Hz Log Hz fz = 900 Hz fbn = 1800 Hz (Dn = 100%) fbz = 36 Hz (Dz = 2%) fn = 100% dB Note: The value entered in MD 1516 (Numerator bandwidth speed setpoint filter 1) must not be greater than twice the value set in MD 1515 (b[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: When 0 is entered for the bandwidth, the filter is parameterized as a proportional element with a gain of 1. Numerator bandwidth speed setpoint f. 2 1519 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0.0 0.0 7 999.0 Hz Active at once The description of[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Example: 500 m 400 10.0 dB -30.0 500 m 400 180 Phase Deg -180 Log Hz Log Hz fz = 54 Hz Dz = 10% fn = 40 Hz Dn = 70% fz = 35 Hz Dz = 6% fn = 40 Hz Dn = 70% 500 m 400 10.0 dB -30.0 500 m 400 180 Phase Deg -180 Log Hz Log Hz © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 08.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Band-stop filter natural frequency set speed filter 2 1521 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 100 1 141 % Active at once The description of this machine data is the same as that for machine data MD 1520 ! Concealable alarms (Power On) 1600 Default[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Note: Reset 611D alarms can be acknowledged via a software reset. Caution: Concealing the reset alarms may result in irreparable damage to the power section. Concealable alarms (Reset) 1601 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Act[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Timer motor temperature alarm 1603 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 240 0 600 s Active at once Input of timer for the motor temperature alarm. When the value set in "Motor temperature warning" (MD 1602) is exceeded, a message is transf[...]

08.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Switchoff limit motor temperature 1607 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 155 0 200 °C Active at once Input of motor temperature at which motor must be switched off. The motor temperature is detected via temperature sensors and evaluated in the d[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Response threshold dn/dt 1611 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 800 0 1 600 % Active at once Input of response threshold for dn / dt monitoring function. Caution: This machine data is required for the load test. It is relevant only for internal S[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Config. shutdown react. RESET alarms 1613 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0100/FFFF 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input bit field for switching over the appropriate 611D reset alarm. It is possible to select one of two shutdown reactions, i.e. p[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Value table: Bit 0 Variable message function 0 = not active 1 = active Bit 1 Segment variable message function 0 = address space X 1 = address space Y Bit 2 Comparison variable message function 0 = comparison without sign 1 = comparison with sign Note: Bit 1 is effect[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Machine data which correspond to this machine data are as follows: • Signal number variable message function (MD 1621) • Address variable message function (MD 1622) • Threshold variable message function (MD 1623) • Hysteresis variable message function (MD 1624[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Value table: Signal number Signal designation Scaling (LSB corresponds to:) 0 Physical address – 1 - – 2 Current I R MD 1710 3 Current I S MD 1710 4 Current I d MD 1710 5 Current I q MD 1710 6 Current setpoint I q (limited after filter) MD 1710 7 Current setpoint [...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Address variable message function 1622 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of address of memory location to be monitored via the variable message function. Note: This machine data is operative only if the sig[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Pickup delay variable message function 1625 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10 000 ms Active at once Input of ON (pickup) delay time for setting of the message if the threshold (with hysteresis) is exceeded (see diagram under MD 1620). Note[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Voltage step for generator control 1632 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 30 0 300 V Active at once Input of response threshold of DC link voltage. In conjunction with machine data "Response voltage generator axis" (MD 1631), this data [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Drive operating modes Emergency retraction 1636 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 7 - Active at once Input to select various operating modes in the drive operating modes word. It defines 8 operating modes for the following cases of failure: ?[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Emergency retraction time 1638 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 10000 ms Active at once This machine data is relevant only for Siemens-internal purposes and must not be altered . Emergency retraction speed 1639 Default value Lower input limi[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Diagnosis control 1650 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input to select a variety of diagnostic functions in the diagnostic control word. Caution: This machine data is relevant only for Siemens-internal purposes[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) • Diagnostic function "Voltage-controlled V q operation" (up to SW 4) A voltage-controlled operating mode (V / F mode) is applied in order to diagnose speed or current sensor faults. In this operating mode, voltages V q and V d = 0 as well as a frequency a[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Value table: Signal number Signal designation Scaling (LSB corresponds to:) 0 Physical address – 1 - – 2 Current I R MD 1710 3 Current I S MD 1710 4 Current I d MD 1710 5 Current I q MD 1710 6 Current setpoint I q (limited after filter) MD 1710 7 Current setpoint [...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Memory location min/max memory 1652 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0000 0000 FFFF Hex Active at once Input of address of memory location to be monitored via the min / max memory function. Note: This machine data is operative only if the signal[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Segment memory location monitor 1655 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0 0 1 – Active at once This machine data addresses the memory location segment for the monitoring function. Value table: 0 DSP address space X 1 DSP address space Y MD 1655 [...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Value display monitor 1657 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 0000 0000 FFFF FFFF Hex Active at once Output of monitoring function display value. This machine data displays the content of the address resulting from the segment (MD 1655[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Ratio V/f during V/f mode (SW 4.4 only) 1661 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 2.4 0.0 100.0 V/Hz Active at once Input of a voltage / frequency ratio value for the drive in voltage-controlled V / F operation. The following applies to the V q volt[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Examples: n set ( ) t > 0 ; n set - n act > DELTA (ZK3 Bit 7 halt ramp block) 1. n set ( ) t < 0 ; n set - n act > – DELTA (ZK3 Bit 6 halt ramp block) 2. Graphic representation: Ramp-function generator with and without ramp-function generator automatic c[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) When DELTA is calculated, it must be taken into account that the torque setpoint limitation m set,limit may change in cyclic operation. This limitation acts on the maximum speed difference n max . m set, limit IPO cycle n max = –––––––––––––?[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Motor temperature 1702 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 °C Active at once This machine data is used to display the motor temperature. The motor temperature is measured by appropriate sensors and evaluated in the drive. Lead time co[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Speed actual value 1707 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 -100000.0 100000.0 rev/min Active at once This machine data is used to display the actual speed value and represents the unfiltered actual speed value. Time-synchronous unlatching (s[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Significance speed representation 1711 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0.0 -100000.0 100000.0 rev/min Active at once This machine data is used to display the significance of the speed representation. The user is informed of the significance o[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Current actual value (effective) (as from SW 6) 1719 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – – – A eff Active at once Current actual value display. The signal can be output via DAC. MD 1719 = i 2 qact + i 2 dact CRC diagnosis parameter 1720 D[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Ramp-up time 1723 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32767 ms Active at once Load test: The ramp-up time of the drive is indicated in this machine data. The ramp-up time is the time between one 0-1 edge of the control word signal "Ramp-[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Operating mode (display) 1730 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0000 0000 FFF Hex Active at once This data indicates the current operating mode. Bit 0 FDD 0: off 1: on Bits 1-3 Not assigned Bit 4 MSD 0: off 1: on Bits 5-11 Not assigned Bit 12 V[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) CPU load (as from SW 6) 1735 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 100 % Active at once The processor capacity displays the remaining available CPU time online. Measuring circuit type indirect measuring system 1790 Default value Lower output li[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) Firmware date 1798 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 32 767 – Active at once Output of coded software version in decimal notation. The software version is output in the following form: DDMMY, where DD = day, MM = month and Y = last digit [...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) MD No. Motor 2 Title MD No. Motor 1 2132 Motor rated voltage 1132 2134 Motor rated frequency 1134 2135 Motor no-load voltage 1135 2136 Motor no-load current 1136 2137 Stator resistance cold 1137 2138 Rotor resistance cold 1138 2139 Stator leakage reactance 1139 2140 R[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.3.2 Drive MD (data description) MD No. Motor 2 Title MD No. Motor 1 2410 Integral-action time upper adaptation speed 1410 2411 Lower adaptation speed 1411 2412 Upper adaptation speed 1412 2413 Selection adaptation speed controller 1413 2414 Natural frequency ref. model speed 1414 2417 Message n x fo[...]

07.97 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4 FDD / MSD-specific diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) 7.4 FDD/MSD-specific diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) 7.4.1 Output of diagnosis/service machine data (as from SW 3) The diagnosis / service machine data provide an overview and evaluation of signals and states of the FDD[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 07.97 7.4.2 Servo service data (SSD) Quadrant error (QEC – as from SW 4) 3002 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – -99999.999 99999.999 mm/ms Active at once This machine data displays the quadrant error plane at the instant at which the appropriate axis executed the last speed zer[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Module order code (as from SW 4) 10100- 10114 10119 1) Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units 0 0 65535 - Active on Power on The "Module order code" machine data contains the selected module in the form of a de[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Ramp-up phase 11000 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 0505 – Active at once The "Ramp-up phase" machine data contains the control word for the ramp-up control of the 611D components. This machin[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Status word 1 11002 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 FFFF Hex Active after ramp-up of 611D link This machine data contains the low-order status bits (bits 0 - 15) of the cyclical status word at the interfa[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 09.95 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Status word 1 11004 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 FFFF Hex Active after ramp-up of 611D link This machine data contains the low-order status bits (bits 0-15) of the cyclical status word at the interface[...]

09.95 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Bit 10 - SW 4 Command variable 0 : torque 1 : speed Bits 11-12 (Bit 11:) Master-slave operation setpoint Bit 13 Travel against fixed stop setpoint 0 : off 1 : on Bit 14 C axis mode setpoint Bit 15 Sign of life Status class 2 11006 Default [...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 10.94 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Bit 2 - SW 4 Bit 3 - SW 3 Bit 3 - SW 4 Bit 4 - SW 3 Bit 4 - SW 4 Bit 5 - SW 3 Bit 5 - SW 4 Bit 6 - SW 4 I n act I < n min Programmable message 4 I n act I < n x Programmable message 5 n soll = n ist Programmable message 6 Variable me[...]

10.94 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Capacity utilization (as from SW 4) 11009 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – 0000 7FFF Hex Active at once This machine data specifies the capacity utilization of the digital drive as a percentage (0 ... 7FFF H ˆ[...]

7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 04.96 7.4.3 Diagnosis / service MD (data description - as from SW 3) Position actual value 12000 Default value Lower output limit Upper output limit Units – -99999999 99999999 – Active at once Output of currently valid position actual value which is dependent on the position control for rotary axes (NC-[...]

04.96 7 Drive Machine Data (SIMODRIVE Drive MD) 7.5 Safety Integrated (SI) data 7.5 Safety Integrated (SI) data Note: The SINUMERIK Safety Integrated function is an option. The Safety Integrated machine and service data are described in the documentation SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (Description of Functions). END OF SECTION © Siemens AG 1992 All R[...]

10.94 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.1 General 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.1 General 8.1.1 Entering PLC MD (up to SW 2) You must set the PLC machine data (PLC MD) to adapt the PLC system program to the machine tool and to the PLC user program. The PLC MD are transferred from the machine data area to the data blocks on a PLC cold restart. There the[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 08.96 8.1.2 Breakdown of the PLC MD 8.1.2 Breakdown of the PLC MD PLC MD DB Description Softkey Section 0 to 839 DB60 MD for operating system System data 8.2 2000 to 2849 DB61 MD for function blocks FB data 8.3 4000 to 4049 DB62 MD for user User data 8.4 6000 to 6599 DB63 MD bits for operating system System bits 8.5 7000[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Time base for calling OB 5 2 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 +1 3 2.5 ms DB 60 DW 2 Time base for calling OB 6 3 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 +1 9 10 ms DB 60 DW[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Last active channel 8 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 4 – DB 60 DW 8 Last active spindle 9 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 1 1 6 – DB 60 DW 9 Last active axis 10 1) Default value Lower input limit Upper i[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Example: Value in PLC MD 11 = 71 when 1st machine control panel in PLC MD 128 is set to start address 64. I byte 0 : : : I byte 71 I byte 72 : : I byte 127 Signals from the machine Can be used as additional flag area Max. 128 bytes on 135 WB Reserved 14 Default valu[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) No. of function numbers 19 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 3 0 10 – DB 60 DW 19 Number of function numbers for a UI kernel sequence initiation. Input values: 0 = UI kernel sequence initiation not allowed in this PLC 1...10 (max.) = UI kerne[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) You can enable the individual bits in PLC MD 6052, and set the positive or negative edge to be evaluated in PLC MD 6055. A rapid input is possible only when bit 0 of PLC MD 6051 is set to "0". OB2 is invoked when bit 2 of PLC MD 6050 is "0". No. [...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 06.93 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Table for MD 34 to 123 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 49 50 51 52 [...]

06.93 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 1[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) Byte no. of 2nd alarm byte 125 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units - 1 - 1 127 (SW 4 and higher) – DB 60 DW 125 Byte no. of 1st alarm byte 124 DB 60 DW 124 Byte no. of 3rd alarm byte 126 DB 60 DW 126 Byte no. of 4th alarm byte 127 DB 60 DW 127 [...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.2 PLC MD for the operating system (system data) High byte (DL) Low byte (DR) DW No. PLC MD No. DW 130 MD 130 DW 131 MD 131 DW 132 MD 132 DW 133 MD 133 DW 134 MD 134 DW 135 MD 135 DW 136 MD 136 DW 137 MD 137 Machine data words for PLC operating system (DB 60) Address interrupt byte –1 ... 254 Default setting=–[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.01 8.3 PLC MD for function blocks (FB data) 8.3 PLC MD for function blocks (FB data) PLC MD values for tool management package 2000 to 2077 Default value Lower input limit Upper input limit Units 0– DB 61 DW 0 - 77 For values and their meanings, refer to the Tool Management description. PLC MD values for computer li[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6000 1) DL 0 6 2) 5 2) 4321 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Signals from / to NC channel Default value: 0000 1111 This MD is used to enable the interchange of channel signals between NC and PLC. Because the 840 s[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6012 1) DL 6 654321 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Signals from / to spindle Default value: 0000 0001 This MD enables the interchange of spindle signals between NC and PLC. As the basic configuration of the 840T includes only one spindle, bit 0 must be "1&[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6026 DL 13 Enable serial interface DB37 Enable init in same channel Deselect autom. NC START INHIBIT with MDA Save flag area Access to PLC data inhibited with @ Command channel enabled PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Default value: 1000 000 Bit 7 When bit 7 is s[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6030 DL 15 4321 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Error / operational messages on inactive channels 1) Default value: All bits default to 0 0 signal: Corresponding inactive channel DB is not used to activate error/operational messages. 1 signal: The inactive chann[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6032 DL 16 DR 9 DL 9 DR 8 DL 8 DR 7 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 6033 DR 16 DR 11 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Alarm channel DB Alarm channel DB Default value: All bits default to 0 Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the correspondi[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6035 DR 17 DR k+3 DL k+3 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Alarm DB 32 Default value: All bits default to 0 K = 0, 4, 8, 12, ... 116 (1st to 30th axis) Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for error messages. B[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6040 DL 20 DR 9 DL 9 DR 8 DL 8 DR7 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 6041 DR 20 DR 11 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Signal channel DB Signal channel DB Default value: All bits default to 0 Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the correspond[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6042 DL 21 DR k+3 DL k+3 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Signal DB 31 Default value: All bits default to 0 K = 0, 4, 8, 12, 16, 20 (1st to 6th spindle) Bit = 0 The system software does not evaluate the bits in the corresponding interface byte for operational mes[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6044 DL 22 DR 4 DL 4 DR 3 DL 3 DR 2 DL 2 DR 1 DL 1 6045 DR 22 DR 8 DL 8 DR 7 DL 7 DR 6 DL 6 DR 5 DL 5 6046 DL 23 DR 12 DL 12 DR 11 DL 11 DR 10 DL 10 DR 9 DL 9 6047 DR 23 DL 16 DR 15 DL 15 DR 14 DL 14 DR 13 DL 13 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Signal DB 58 Signa[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6048 DL 24 OB 7 OB 6 OB 5 OB 4 OB 3 OB 2 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Stop during processing delay by Default value: 1111 1100 Bit = 0 A delay in the relevant OB does not force the programmable controller to STOP. Bit = 1 A delay in the relevant OB forces the[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6049, bit 2 = 0 PLC minimum cycle time switched on (default setting). 6049, bit 2 = 1 PLC minimum cycle time switched off, i.e. the PLC cycle time is derived from the running time of the user program. If the PLC minimum cycle time is switched off with PLC machine da[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6052 DL 26 76543210 6053 DR 26 76543210 PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Enable central interrupt byte IF PLC / PLC 135 WD Reserved Default value: 0 An EU interface module's eight interrupt inputs can be enabled separately. Bit = 0 Input is disabled Bit = 1 [...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6064 DL 32 High-level language PLM PLC MD DB63 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Default value: All bits default to 0 Bit 0 Bit = 0 PL / M programming not possible Bit = 1 PL / M programming Permits function blocks written in the higher-level programming language PL / M to be[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 09.95 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) PLC MD Default values 6400 - 6431 0000 0001 6480 - 6511 0000 0001 6560 - 6563 1111 1111 6572 - 6575 1111 1111 These PLC MDs are internal system bits. The default values must not be changed. 6068 DL 34 6069 DR 34 6070 DL 35 6071 DR 35 6072 DL 36 6073 DR 36 6074 DL 37[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6080 DL 40 DR 20 DL 20 DR 19 DL 19 DR 18 DL 18 DR 17 DL 17 6081 DR 40 DR 24 DL 24 DR 23 DL 23 DR 22 DL 22 DR 21 DL 21 6082 DL 41 DR 28 DL 28 DR 27 DL 27 DR 26 DL 26 DR 25 DL 25 6083 DR 41 DL 32 DR 31 DL 31 DR 30 DL 30 DR 29 DL 29 6084 DL 42 DR 20 DL 20 DR 19 DL 19 D[...]

8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 11.92 8.5 PLC MD for the operating system (system bits) 6096 DL 48 6097 DR 48 6098 DL 49 6099 DR 49 PLC performance (IA) PLC MD No. DW No. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit No. 76543210 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 6400 . . 6419 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be set to 1 6480 . . 6499 Internal system bits Bit 0 must be s[...]

09.95 8 PLC Machine Data (PLC MD) 8.7 PLC MD bits for the user (user bits) 8.7 PLC MD bits for the user (user bits) 8000 to 8049 DW 0 - DW 24 PLC MD DB65 DW No. Bit No. 76543210 Default value: 0 In addition to PLC MD words, PLC MD bits are also available to the user to do with as he sees fit. The available bit area comprises 25 words (400 bits). Th[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 9–1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9 Drive Servo Start-Up Application (as from SW 3) Introduction SW 3 / SW 4 provides support for drive start-up and diagnostics by means of the following functions: Description in section Measurement of drive control loops (current, speed, position) 9.2 Functio[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Internal The following conditions must be fulfilled before the traversing motion can be started: S NC operating mode “ JOG ” S No traversing command for axis/spindle S No follow-up mode (for axes) S No parking S No axis/spindle disable S No alarms S No EM[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The following start conditions must be fulfilled when the measuring functions are started. S NC operating mode “ JOG ” selected. S No traversing command for the axis/spindle (NCK or com- mand channel). The “ Overstore ” function is disabled while the [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.1.1 Selection of/menu trees of drive servo start-up application Diagnosis Drive servo startup Start-up Explanation The drive servo start-up display (identical to the machine configuration display MDD) is called by means of the “ Diagnosis ” , “ Start-[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 9–5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Menu tree: Axis start-up function 1) Start-up fct. axis Current contr . loop Speed contr . loop Position contr . loop Function generator Neural QEC 1) Measure- ment Meas. paras. Contr . para drive Display File functions Measure- ment Meas.- paras. Contr .par[...]

Start Stop 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Menu tree: Spindle start-up function 1) Start-up fct. spindle Speed contr . loop Position contr . loop Function generator Current 1) contr . loop Measure- ment Meas. paras. Contr .para drive Display File functions Measure- ment Meas. paras. Contr[...]

Copy to clipboard Paste from clipboard 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Copying / pasting measuring parameter files into / from the clipboard With these softkeys you can re-use measuring parameter files that have been stored for the axis X, for example, for other axes as well (e.g. for axi[...]

X marker Y marker Expand Picture 1 Picture 2 Picture 1 + Picture 2 X lin/log Correct display Axis +/– Spindle +/– Contr .para. FDD Contr .para. MSD Contr .para. drive Contr .para. NC 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–8 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) This softkey activates or deactivates the marker with the horizontal dir[...]

Display File functions 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–9 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note With SW 4 and higher , the Contr .para FDD and Contr .para MSD softkeys have been combined under the Contr .para drive softkey with one exception: Under the circularity test function, the softkeys have remained as they were in SW 3[...]

Accept configur . SIEMENS Service 1 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–10 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Explanation This softkey gives you access to the control functions Load , Save and Delete with which you can load, save or delete a special measurement setting (configu- ration). Displays/measurement results can likewise b[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9– 11 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.2 Measuring the drive servo loops (current, speed, position) Note When measuring the spindle it is important not to enter the weak field range as this produces an incorrect display . Measurements in The integrated time-range measuring functions of the dri[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–12 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) e.g. for 125 m s sampling time (cycle) Owing to the short measuring times, traversing paths of a few revolutions are sufficient for the frequency response measurement. The measurement time is calculated as follows: Meas. time [s]  512 x No. of averaging o[...]

Current control loop 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–13 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Y ou can set the filters or controller parameters as required by means of “ Contr .para FDD ” or “ Contr .para MSD ” . Y ou should check their effect immediately after a further measurement. Y ou can also determine from the Bode [...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–14 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.2.2 Current control loop – measurement parameters (as from SW 3) Default settings Measurement = frequency response and measured quantity = current actual value . Y ou can select the menu with the measurement parameters for the current con[...]

Speed control loop 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–15 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.2.3 Speed control loop (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) Y ou can select the measuring function for the speed control loop with this softkey . Notes T est measurements on the speed control loop (axis and spindle) can be perfor- med on [...]

Meas. parameters 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–16 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.2.4 Speed control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (4 basic settings – as from SW 3) Overview of The types of measurement available depend on the type of drive used. V arious measurement types variables can be measured [...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–17 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) As from SW 6: S The offset is reached along an acceleration ramp. S The acceleration value is defined for an axis: MD 276*: Acceleration spindle: MD 419* – MD 426*: Acceleration constant for 8 gear stages S The following applies: Accelerati[...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–18 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D 3rd measurement type: Setpoint step change The transient response of the speed control in the time range can be assessed with the step stimulation function for setpoint or disturbance variables. If an off- set value other than zero is input[...]

Meas. parameter Position contr . loop 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–19 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D 4th Measurement type: Disturbance step change The transient response of the speed control in the time range can be assessed with the step stimulation function for setpoint or disturbance variables. If an off- set value[...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–20 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.2.6 Position control loop (axis and spindle) – measurement parameters (9 basic settings – as from SW 3) Overview of types The types of measurement listed below are not dependent on the drive used. of measurement V arious variables can b[...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–21 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) S A veraging operations The higher this value is set, the more accurate the measurement and the lon- ger the measurement time. Y ou should normally enter a value of 20. S Settling time This value represents the delay between the start of meas[...]

Meas. parameter 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–22 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Notes In order to ensure a more gentle machine setting, the lowest possible values should be set for amplitude and offset . Excessively high input values result in the output of alarm messages such as “ 1560 Speed setpoint alarm limit viola[...]

Function generator 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–23 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.3 Function generator (axis and spindle – as from SW 3) Y ou can select the function generator with this softkey . Note Axes and spindles can be traversed with the function generator in both analog and digital drives. Explanation The fu[...]

Signal parameters 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–24 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Selection of function generator parameterization “ Signal types with operating modes” Y ou can select the menu with the signal parameters for the function generator in the five operating modes with this softkey . Note Y ou enter the s[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–25 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.3.2 Additional information (notes) on measurement and signal parameters (as from SW 3) Overrange The maximum values which may be set for amplitudes, offset and acceleration are dependent upon (see also corresponding NC and drive machine data): S Drive type[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–26 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.3.3 Signal waveforms of function generator (as from SW 3) D Square-wave (speed setpoint) E1 T2 T1 E2 t –A +A Speed setpoint O Fig. 9.6 Conditions Operating mode : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) Signal type : Square-wave E1 : Switch-on instant[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–27 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Conditions Operating mode : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) Signal type : Sawtooth E1 : Switch-on instant (NC Start hardkey) E2 : Switch-off instant (e.g. NC Reset) T1 : Period A : Amplitude (+/ –) O : Speed offset Explanation The speed setpoint[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–28 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Ramp 1 (position setpoint) MD RD t A s ESD t O v Speed character- istic Position Fig. 9.9 Conditions Operating mode : Position setpoint Signal type : Ramp ESD : Settling time RD : Ramp time MD : Measuring time A : Amplitude O : Speed offset Note Set accele[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–29 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Ramp 2 (position setpoint with reduced acceleration value) MD RD t A s ESD t O v Speed character- istic Position Fig. 9.10 Conditions Operating mode : Position setpoint Signal type : Ramp ESD : Settling time RD : Ramp time MD : Measurement time A : Amplitu[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–30 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Step change (speed setpoint) MD t O A v ESD t s Position character- istic Speed setpoint Fig. 9.1 1 Conditions Operating mode : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) Signal type : Step change ESD : Settling time MD : Measurement time A : Amplitude O :[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–31 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Step change (position setpoint) MD t A s ESD t O v Speed character- istic Position setpoint Fig. 9.12 Conditions Operating mode : Position setpoint Signal type : Step change ESD : Settling time MD : Measurement time A : Amplitude O : Speed offset Explanati[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–32 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Effect of scaling on the signal waveform t –A +A nset E3 0.65 A Fig. 9.13 Conditions Operating mode : Speed setpoint (position controller cycle) Signal type : Sawtooth E3 : Change in scaling value by user (e.g. from 65% to 100%) A : Amplitude (+/ –) Ex[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–33 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.4 Mixed I/O configuration and digital-analog converter , DAC (as from SW 3) General notes on The possible applications for digital-analog converters described in this Section mixed I/O are used to conduct test measurements on digital signals from the drive[...]

Configur . DAC 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–34 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note The test sockets on 61 1D modules have an output voltage of between 0 and 5 V; 61 1A modules have a +/ – 10 V output. The test sockets can be evaluated in the usual way . These sockets are not intended for use in normal operation . Anwa[...]

Configur . mixed I/O 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–35 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Lower input limit Upper input limit SERVO (SW 3 SW 4) –7 31 FDD (SW 3/SW 4) –7 23 MSD (SW 3) 0 15 MSD (SW 4) –7 23 Notes Make sure that the selected drive (display) corresponds to the connected test sockets (DACs) of the appropriat[...]

Selection meas. signal 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–36 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Explanation In this display , the output DACs are assigned via drive selection (+/ – ) and speci- fication of the axis/spindle name . The offset input values must make allowance for the output range of the analog voltage signal. The [...]

Selection meas. signal 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–37 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Selection list for Speed setpoint low 61 1D MSD (spindle) Speed setpoint high only Speed actual value low Speed actual value high Speed actual value amount Rated power as percentage Motor rated torque as percentage T orque setpoint Act[...]

SIEMENS Service 2 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–38 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Current actual value i_q (torque-producing) Rotor flux setpoint Rotor flux actual value (MSD only) Current setpoint i_d Current actual value i_d Cross voltage U (q) Longitudinal voltage U (d) Current actual value i_r (Phase R) Current actua[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–39 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5 Quadrant error compensation 9.5.1 General comments T echnical reasons why If an axis is accelerated from a negative to a positive velocity (or vice versa), it quadrant error compen- sticks when passing through zero speed because of the changing friction [...]

Measurement Start Stop 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–40 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Fig. 9.16 Explanation The axis names with which the circle is to be traversed are selected in this dis- play . No check is made to ascertain whether the selected axes correspond to those programmed in the part program. The measurement [...]

Display Axis +, – Service QEC 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–41 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Any measurements which may not be complete at the point of interruption are displayed as well as possible under the Display softkey . No monitoring functions are activated in this case. The part program (for circle traversal) [...]

Display 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–42 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Explanation The following service data are output cyclically in the above display: S The following service data are output cyclically in the above display: S The axial acceleration at the instant of the last speed zero crossing S The compensation amp[...]

Display 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–43 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Note The displayed measurement results can be stored as a file on the MMC by selecting softkey File functions . Data output of Data can be output on an external PC via the V24 interface and circularity test by means of commands in the “ Services ?[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–44 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.3 Conventional quadrant error compensation (as from SW 2) Corresponding S MD 1332* data 1236* 1240* 1244* 1248* 1252* 1256* S MD 1804*, bit 6 1804*, bit 7 1824*, bit 0 Parameterization The friction feedforward control is activated axis-specifically via M[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–45 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) II Counter 2 Counter 1 I III IV Quadrant transition point Fig. 9.20 Radius deviations at the quadrant transition points without compensation Setting the compensa- If the compensating amplitude is too small, the circularity test shows that the ting amplitude [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–46 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) II Counter 2 Counter 1 I III IV Fig. 9.22 Compensating amplitude too high Setting the compensa- If the compensation time constant used in the circularity test is too small, the test tion time constant shows that the radius deviation is compensated for , for [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–47 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) II Counter 2 Counter 1 I III IV Fig. 9.24 Compensation time constant too large If it is not possible to find a uniform compensation time constant for the various radii and velocities, the average value of the derived time constants is used. If it has been po[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–48 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.3.2 Installation with adaptation characteristic If the compensation is acceleration dependant, a characteristic must be determi- ned in a second stage. The required compensation amplitudes for different radii and velocities are deter- mined, the effect o[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–49 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) curve have been correctly calculated and/or have been entered in the correct input format (caution: MD 1252* uses a format factor 100 larger than MDs 1244* and 1248*!) Example for setting a. T o derive the actual acceleration the characteristic The accelerat[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–50 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.4 Neural quadrant error compensation (QEC – SW 4) Explanation/basic The quadrant error compensation function reduces the contour errors resulting principles from friction, backlash or torsional stresses during reversal. Errors are compen- sated through[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–51 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The operating procedure from SW 3 can still be used if, for example, the condi- tions listed under facilitation of start-up cannot be met or if there is insufficient computing time available for the neuronal network. Quantization of The input quantity (setpo[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–52 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 12 3 a 3 a 1 a 2 Acceleration Interval width Fig. 9.28 V alues a1 (lower range limit) and a2 (medium range limit) can be parameterized (see Function parameters softkey), a3 (max. acceleration) is the upper limit of the parameterized operating range. The stan[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–53 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Standard start-up QEC Explanation The start-up process is semi-automatic and does not involve any external equip- ment. The contour accuracy achieved can be checked by means of the circularity test implemented internally in the control or with the aid of e[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–54 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Acceleration V elocity Path +a 1 –a 1 +a 1 +a 2 +a 2 –a 2 t t t T Per T Per T Per Fig. 9.29 The test signal generates successive reversing processes which are executed at an acceleration rate which slowly decreases over the three sections of the oper- at[...]

Neural QEC 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–55 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.4.1 Start-up of neural QEC Y ou can select the “ Neural quadrant error compensation ” function for axes with this softkey . Fig. 9.30 Explanation/Notes The input/information output display Learn has the same structure as the Mea- surement [...]

Function parameters 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–56 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) D Neural QEC parameterization Y ou can select the menu with the function parameters for the neural QEC func- tion with this softkey . Fig. 9.31 Notes Y ou enter the function parameters in this display . If the neural QEC has not yet been [...]

Parameter transfer Display 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–57 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) between 4 and 32 may be entered. The default setting after “ Load default ” is 8. S Coarse quantization This parameter defines the coarse quantization of the input quantity . V alues of >1 and <250 may be entered. The def[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–58 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.4.2 Further optimization and intervention options Checking methods 1st method: Circularity test 2nd method: Display of characteristic – in this display , the compensation amplitude is output as a % of the maximum speed as a function of the set memory p[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–59 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Direction-specific Direction-specific injection can be selected via a function parameter under the compensation Function parameters softkey . This is necessary in cases where the compensa- tion is not equally effective in opposing quadrants when the injectio[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–60 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The number of learning process runs can be reduced particularly in cases where data blocks are already available for the machine type in question so that only minor optimization measures are required. When “ Detailed learning ” is set to “ yes ” , th[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–61 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The decay time is not adapted when a value of 0 or of less than or equal to the value in NC-MD 12360 is entered in NC-MD 13640. Monitoring of the decay time continues to ensure that it cannot become a nega- tive value at maximum acceleration (100 % of accele[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–62 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) In special cases, however , it may still be necessary to re-parameterize the error measuring times: S Setting of very extreme values for the compensation time constant (NC-MD 12360). Experience shows that error measuring times of <10 ms and >200 ms are[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–63 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.5.4.3 Power ON/OFF – monitoring functions – special functions (SW 4) Power ON procedure After power ON, the boot file stored for the neuronal QEC must be transferred from the MMC to the SERVO. These data are transferred in the same way as 61 1D drive m[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–64 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.6 SERVO trace (SW 4) Explanation T o supplement the start-up functions “ DAC output ” and “ Measurement function ” implemented in SW 3, SW 4 includes a trace function with the following function- ality: S 4 trace buffers with 2048 values S Output o[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–65 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) T rigger conditions for starting the recording can be set in the field marked “ Trig- ger ” . The following settings are provided: S No trigger  default setting for trace 1 S Edge signal  threshold  Recording starts if selected signal is greater[...]

Selection meas. signal 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–66 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.6.1 Selection of measured signal Y ou can select lists containing a selection of signals with this vertical softkey (see Fig. 9.35). Explanation Signals are selected or deselected with the cursor hardkeys and softkeys ok and Abort . [...]

SIEMENS Service 3 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–67 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Y ou can select the SIEMENS Service 3 function with this vertical softkey . The displayed signals are not explained here. The SIEMENS Service 3 softkey function is relevant only for SIEMENS servicing procedures and should be used only after[...]

Display 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–68 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 9.6.2 SERVO trace display Y ou can call the graphic representation of the SERVO trace function by selecting this softkey . Follow.g error Part. setpt Fig. 9.37 Explanation T wo SERVO trace signals are output in this display . The trigger is shown as [...]

Configure display 09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 9–69 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) The two displays (Picture 1/Picture 2) can be set by means of this softkey . Fig. 9.38 Explanation The displays called by means of softkey Display (Picture 1/Picture 2) can be set in the above display . The displays can be allocated to trac[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.1 Determining sampling interval and interpolation time 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.1 Determining sampling interval and interpolation time Corresponding data MD 155 NC MD Position controller basic clock frequency MD 160 Ratio of interpolation to position control MD 168 Drive basic cycle time MD 1396*[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.1 Determining sampling interval and interpolation time Setting • Enter drive basic cycle time in MD 168 (in 62.5 µ s). • Enter position control basic clock frequency in MD 155 (multiplier MD 168). • Enter ratio to interpolation time in MD 160. • If MD is incorrect, alarm 1012* ”Parameterization e[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.1 Determining sampling interval and interpolation time Notes: • The maximum value of the basic utilization should be approx. 70%. • Evaluation of the CPU utilization is performed in a 960 ms timebase in order to be able to display a "stable" mean value. How the NC CPU utilization is displayed [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 06.93 10.2 Axis-specific resolutions 10.2 Axis-specific resolutions Corresponding data MD 5002 bit 4-7 Input resolution MD 564* bit 5 Rotary axis MD 1800* bit 0-3 Position control resolution MD 1800* bit 4-7 Display resolution Indirectly related: MD 155 Position controller's sampling interval MD 160 Ratio of in[...]

12.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.2 Input, display and position control resolution Display resolution In addition to the input resolution, the user must also define the display resolution. In contrast to the input resolution, the display resolution is defined separately for each axis. NC MD 1800*, bits 4-7, are provided for this purpose. [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 12.93 10.2.3 Resolution block diagram 10.2.3 Resolution block diagram Input Input resolution MD 5002 bits 4-7 G70 / G71 X 0.5 Geometry resolution Unit system MD 5002 bits 4-7 Pos. control resolution MD 1800* bits 0-3 Contouring error calculation M Set speed resolution DAC 1:8192 Drive control X 4 Display resolution [...]

06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.4 Resolution codes 10.2.4 Resolution codes The following Table shows the codes for the various types of resolution. Alarm 4 ("Illegal input system") is issued when illegal values are entered as machine data. NC MD 5002, bit 4 is used to identify the units system. Metric input system G71 (bit 4 =[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 03.95 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations Permissible resolution combinations Input resolution, display resolution and position control resolution can be defined in any combination within certain limits (see the following two tables). Please note that a factor of max[...]

03.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations Valid combinations of position control resolution and input resolution Unit system Position control resolution Input resolution mm 10 -1 10 -2 10 -3 10 -4 10 -5 inch 10 -1 10 -2 10 -3 10 -4 10 -5 mm 0.5 x 10 -1 [degr.] xy --------- mm 0.5 x 10 -2 [mm][degr.] - xy ----[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 03.95 10.2.6 The influence of resolution on velocity Input resolution Smallest programmable path velocity 10 -2 mm, degrees 0.1 mm / min, degrees / min 10 -3 mm, degrees 0.01 mm / min, degrees / min 10 -4 mm, degrees 0.001 mm / min, degrees / min 10 -5 mm, degrees 0.0001 mm / min, degrees / min 10 -3 inch, degrees 0[...]

06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.6 The influence of resolution on speed The maximum path velocity (defined with the input resolution) and the maximum axis velocity together define the maximum velocities. The interpolator breaks down the path velocity into its axis specific velocity components (axis velocities). Then these values are conv[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 06.93 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range The set combination of input resolution and axis-specific position control resolution determines the maximum traversing range (separate for each axis). This maximum traversing range applies to the maximum path between the two axis limitations as w[...]

06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.8 Maximum traversing range Unit system Position control resolution Input resolution 10 -2 [mm] [degrees ] 10 -3 [mm] [degrees] 10 -4 [mm] [degrees ] 10 -5 [mm] [degrees ] inches 0.5 * 10 -1 [degrees] -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- inches 0.5 * 10 -2 [degrees] -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- inche[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 04.96 10.2.5 Permissible resolution combinations Unit system Position control resolution Input resolution 10 -2 [mm] [degrees ] 10 -3 [mm] [degrees] 10 -4 [mm] [degrees ] 10 -5 [mm] [degrees ] mm 0.5 * 10 -1 [degrees] -- -- ±999999.9 degrees -- -- ±999999.9 degrees -- -- -- -- -- -- mm 0.5 * 10 -2 [mm] [degrees] ?[...]

06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.9 Influence on the display 10.2.9 Influence on the display The axis position is displayed with the relevant axis-specific number of decimal places. No distinction is made between linear and rotary axes when defining the number of decimal places. The values for zero offset, working area limitation and scal[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 11.92 10.2.10 Influence on the modes / function ”DRF” function In "DRF" mode, the handwheel pulses are also weighted with the display resolution of the selected axis. If the input resolution is greater than the display resolution (e.g. input resolution 10 -2 mm, position control resolution 0.5 · 10 -3[...]

11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.2.10 Influence on the modes / function Maximum pitch for threads The maximum pitch that can be defined for threads depends on the IPO time and the input resolution. The table shows the maximum product that can be defined for spindle speed · pitch: IPO [ms] Maximum product with IR ... [mm / inches] 10 **-3 [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.94 10.3 BERO (SW 4 and higher) 10.3 BERO (SW 4 and higher) The zero mark can be synchronized to a BERO switch with SW 4 by means of a PCA measuring circuit or with SW 3 by means of actual value acquisition via 611D-PCU. The following machine data are used for switching over from encoder zero mark to BERO synchron[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4 Axis installation 10.4 Axis installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.1 Checking and setting the control direction of the feed axes Simplified block diagram of the drive control system Position controller Speed controller i set n set Current controller n act i act Setpoint position from the interpolat[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 11.92 10.4.1 Drive optimization Yes Yes Yes No No No Pos. polarity of set speed voltage when axes move in pos. direction? 10 mm mech. movement = 10 mm actual value display on NC monitor? Is actual value display on NC monitor being incremented? Bit 2 of NC MD 564* = 0 Move feed axis mechanically in pos. direction Bit[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.2 Speed setpoint matching / tacho compensation NC MD 256* Scaling factor maximum velocity [mm / min] [inches / min] [degrees / min] NC MD 260* Scaling factor maximum speed setpoint [mV] (up to SW 2) [0.01 % of max. setpoint speed] (as from SW 3) The quotient of MD 256* and MD 2[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.4.1 Drive optimization Example (for analog): ”V max ” = 300 mm / min MD 256* = 3000 or 6000 with SW 3 ”U max ” = 9000 mV MD 260* = 90000 or 18000 with SW 3 Example of a linear axis for digital for analog Input / display resolution IS = 10 -4 inch Position control resolution MS = 0.5 · 10 -3 mm Rate[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization n set = speed setpoint in [VELO], [0.01%] or [ mm / min ] MD 268* Max. speed setpoint MD 264* Threshold for drive error MD 280* Max. velocity (progr. rapid traverse G00) MD 288* Conv. feedrate MD 292* Conv. rapid traverse t [sec] n set 20% 5% Example: Overdimensioned drive for a rotar[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 12.93 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.3 Servo gain factor K V NC MD 252* To achieve only negligible contour deviations with continuous path control, a high K V (servo gain) factor (NC MD 252*) is required. If the K V factor is too high, however, instability, overshoots and possibly excessive machine loads result. T[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Enter the servo gain according to the following conversion formula in NC MD 252*: K V (0.01 s -1 ) = 5000 3 K V m / min mm · = 1666 K V m / min mm · The numerical value 1666 is thus input for the K V factor 1. To evaluate the starting conditions and determine whether the set maximum[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 12.93 10.4.1 Drive optimization Overshooting may also have one of the following causes: • Acceleration too great (current threshold is reached) • Excessive rise time of speed circuit • Fault in speed controller (re-optimization may be necessary) • Mechanical backlash • Displaced location of mechanical comp[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Checking/determining the acceleration values Setting: NC MD 276* Criterion: Overshoot-free acceleration or positioning at rapid traverse rate (acceleration stop limit). Under maximum load conditions (heavy workpieces on the machine table) Measuring equipment: Recorders, storage oscill[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.01 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.5 Jerk limitation (as from SW 6) Definition of term: By jerk we mean the change in acceleration per unit of time. Previous behavior (up to SW 5) In the velocity control function used until now, the acceleration changes over time in steps. The aim of this velocity control is to [...]

09.01 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization Example: Maximum jerk (r): 50 m / s 3 Maximum acceleration (a): 4 m / s 2 Programmed velocity (v) 24 m / min Interpolation cycle (TIPO): 10 ms A jerk of 50 m / s3 results in a change in acceleration per IPO cycle of 0.5 ms / 2. This is calculated as follows: 100·TIPO·s 2 r=50 = m s [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 06.93 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.6 Position monitoring Coarse exact stop and fine exact stop tolerance ranges (NC MD 204* and 208*) The approached position is checked. In automatic mode, the next block is not started if the following error exceeds the value entered in NC MD 204* to 208*. Setting The positionin[...]

06.93 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.1 Drive optimization 10.4.1.7 Dynamic contour monitoring Operational faults resulting from the mechanical jamming of axes or drive faults can be detected with the help of dynamic contour monitoring and an incorrect parameterization of the machine data setting for drift and multgain rectified. The contour [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.4.1 Drive optimization In addition to the values set in machine data NC MD 252* (servo gain) and NC MD 260*, 1200* (multgain), the servo gain is also influenced by the tachogenerator compensation in the speed controller (for analog), by the variable increment weighting and by gear ratios etc. NC MD 332*, MD[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.3 Axis traversing 10.4.3 Axis traversing 10.4.3.1 Traversing in jog mode Prerequisites • All axis setpoint cables inserted. • Control direction correct. • Position control loops closed. • All gain values correct. • Safety signals active (EMERGENCY STOP, HARDWARE LIMIT SWITCH). The following alar[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 06.93 10.4.3 Axis traversing In the absence of feed enable and servo enable signals, an indication showing that the axis is not in position (" > ") is screened when the direction key is pressed. The following signals must not be present if the axis is to traverse at the specified speed (with considerati[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 10.4.4 Reference point approach Corresponding data • MD 240* (reference point value) • MD 244* (reference point offset) • MD 284* (reference point cutoff speed) • MD 296* (reference point approach speed) • MD 5008 bit 5 (setting up in jogging mode) • MD 560* bit 6 (r[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 11.92 10.4.4 Reference point approach 1st case: Axis is ahead of the reference point cam Axis is ahead of reference point cam Reference point pulse MD 284* MD 296* 2000 units Speed Path 1 3 4 2 Reference point cam Reference point 0 When the direction key is pressed, the reference point for the axis is approached in [...]

11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 2nd case: Axis is at the reference point cam Rather than accelerate to the reference speed, the axis accelerates immediately to the reference point cutoff speed (MD 284*). Axis is at reference point cam 2 Reference point pulse MD 284* 2000 units Speed Path 3 4 Reference point ca[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 12.93 10.4.4 Reference point approach 10.4.4.2 Reference point approach with automatic direction recognition Prerequisites • MD 560* Bit 6 = 1 • Feed enables set • Reference point cam extends as far as the traversing limit • Reference point is ahead of reference point cam The purpose of automatic direction r[...]

07.97 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach 2nd case : Axis is at the reference point cam Axis is at reference point cam Speed MD 284* d EMERGENCY STOP Reference point 2000 units Path Reference point cam Reference point pulse Traversing limit When the Direction key is pressed, the PLC's "Deceleration" signa[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 01.99 10.4.4 Reference point approach Remarks: • Only one axis per NC block can be programmed (e.g. G74 C L F ) • From SW 5 up to 5 axes can be programmed in one NC block. • TRANSMIT or coupled motion must not be selected • G74 is non modal • Tool offset and zero offset, PRESET + DRF are suppressed interna[...]

07.97 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.4 Reference point approach This function is started by • G74 from the part program (with internal triggering of G200 for this axis at the end of referencing) or • pressing of the direction key enabled for referencing by the user in the reference point approach mode. The block-stepping conditions with [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 07.97 10.4.4 Reference point approach MD 1824* bit 5 enables this function. By means of MD 1824* bit 3 the user can define whether only the "Reference point reached" signal is set with "Set reference dimension" or whether the absolute system is also set to the value specified in MD 240*. MD 1824*[...]

11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks Corresponding data NC MD 240* Reference point value, reference point for leadscrew error compensation NC MD 284* Reference point creep speed NC MD 396* Absolute encoder offset NC MD 564* bit 0 Reference point approach direction (only r[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 11.92 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks The following control loops must be used for processing distance coded reference marks: • SPC control loop. Measuring systems with rectangular and sinusoidal output signals (currents) can be connected to a SPC. Where measuring systems have sinusoidal output signals, EXE [...]

11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 10.4.5.1 Initial installation of distance-coded reference marks The following steps must be followed when installing the distance coded reference marks for the first time: 1. Selecting the measuring system MD 1808*, bit 4, must be set for distance coded reference point app[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 11.92 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 3. Direction of linear scale as compared with the machine system It should be made clear how the linear scale is applied to the machine system. Whether the direction is positive or negative is defined in MD 1808*. • NC MD 1808*, bit 2 = 0 Linear scale same direction as m[...]

11.92 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks 3040 mm n = = 152 1000 . 0.02 mm The following correlation is used for calculating the absolute offset: Position in machine system = Absolute offset + / - absolute position in scale system (x MA ) (x LA ) or Absolute offset = Position in machine system - / + absolute posit[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.4.5 Distance-coded reference marks The absolute offset is the offset between machine zero and the 1st reference mark on the linear scale; at any one point (any axis position) the absolute offset corresponds to the difference between the position to be measured in the machine system (e.g. measured with a las[...]

08.96 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions Corresponding data • MD 131 ... 146 (Spindle override) • MD 4000 ... 499* (Spindle data) • MD 540* bit 2 • MD 5200 bits 0 ... 7 • MD 524* bits 0 ... 3 • MD 521* bit 1 and bit 7 • Interface DB 31 (Spindle DB)[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions General notes: • With a spindle speed of 0.1, the feed actual value indication in the basic display with functions G95 / G96 is too low by a factor of 10. • If the system includes several spindles, a function must always be assigned to the first spindle. The dia[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5 Spindle installation, spindle functions Description of the spindle modes The following is a description of the various modes in which the spindle may be operated. The individual modes can be programmed by NC (part program MDA, overstore), PLC or command channel (CC). The functions that are then available [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.1 Open-loop control mode Gear ratio changing Gear ratio changing is only possible in the open-loop control mode. There can be up to eight different ratios between motor and spindle. A permitted range of speed can be laid down for each gear ratio by defining maximum and minimum speed values. If the speed s[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.1 Open-loop control mode In view of the fact that not all spindle drives are equipped with ramp-function generators, a ramp-function generator was integrated in the control (unit 1 ms). The following enable signals are required for spindle setpoint output: DB 31 Spindle-specific signals •D L K + 1 bit 6[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.2 Oscillation mode 10.5.2 Oscillation mode The oscillation mode can be used with gear ratio changing to facilitate engagement of the gear by oscillating the spindle. When switching from open-loop control to oscillation control, the speed setpoint is first reduced to zero at the deceleration ramp defined b[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Accuracy • The position is entered with an accuracy of 0.01 o . The positioning accuracy achieved by the spindle depends on a number of factors: – The resolution of the angle measuring system – The gain factor of the active gear ratio – The [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Data required This section describes the data that is of special significance to the positioning mode. A detailed description of the machine data and setting data will be found in the Section "NC Machine Data (NC MD) / NC Setting Data (NC SD)&q[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 10.5.3.2 Absolute positioning sequence (M19) The spindle is to be brought to a preset angular position as quickly as possible and stopped there. Driving to a particular position is only possible if the spindle is synchronized with the encoder, i.e. [...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions b) Spindle running The spindle is driven to the specified position as quickly as possible, without changing the direction of rotation. The nearest position at which the spindle can be stopped is calculated from the actual position and the decelerati[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Example for case 1b 0° Example Actual position: 315° Actual rotation: positive Programmed position: 90° Nearest position at which spindle can be stopped: 270° Distance to be traversed in addition to the deceleration distance: +180° Total distan[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 01.99 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions The following applies when selecting the creep speed: The drive must have sufficient acceleration reserves in the speed range below the creep speed, corresponding to the programmed acceleration for position-controlled spindle operation. The values i[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Examples Example 1 0° Last M19 position: 0° Actual position: 270° Specified travel: +180° This means that the spindle has moved 90° from the last M19 position in the opposite direction to the specified direction, so the total is: Distance to be[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 10.5.3.4 Method A and B in the NC-internal solution With the NC-internal solution there are two methods (method A and method B) by which the oriented spindle stop can be integrated into the block sequence of the NC program. Method A (M19 without axi[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions • If the PLC detects the auxiliary function M19 it can prevent the block change by cancellation of the READ-IN ENABLE. • If M19 is reselected before a previous M19 has terminated with the signal "Acknowledge M19", the new spindle posit[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions Referring to the SIMODRIVE 650 Operating Instructions will explain the following: P-54: Scaling factor for set speeds (M19 mode) Terminal for M19: Terminal configurable with P-83 to P-85 The block diagram shows that MD 469* and the SIMODRIVE paramet[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.3 Positioning mode, M19, M19 through several revolutions 10.5.3.6 Aborting the positioning mode The specified position is regarded as having been reached (or the distance as having been traversed) when the spindle is within the position window. This is signalled to the PLC by setting IS:SPINDLE POSITION R[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) When induction motors are used (spindle operation), allowance must be made for their speed- dependent acceleration capability in position-controlled operation: Fig. 1 Torque characteristic of[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) Figure 2 shows the speed characteristics which are obtained when the acceleration capability is fully utilized. In speed-controlled operation, the drive accelerates either according to the acceleration rate (dashed line for T2 in Fig. 2) set in MD 419[...]

10 Axis and Spindle Installation 09.95 10.5.4 Curved acceleration characteristic (SW 4 and higher) When speed n x is set to the same value as limit speed n max or when "0" (default setting) is input, the acceleration characteristic is the same as that obtained with previous software versions, i.e. without characteristic curvature (break p[...]

09.95 10 Axis and Spindle Installation 10.5.5 PLC intervention in spindle control 10.5.5 PLC intervention in spindle control The flowchart on the next page shows the effects of the various PLC interface signals on the spindle. For the sake of clarity, the feedback pulses are not shown. The "Set direction of rotation clockwise", "Osci[...]

12.93 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1 Data area 11 Data Backup/CPU Replacement 11.1 Data area The following data areas are backed up by a battery on the CSB module: NC data: • NC machine data • Cycle machine data • Setting data • Tool offsets • Zero offset • R parameters PLC machine data PLC data (RAM to PLC CPU, ...): • Data bl[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.1 Ways of backing up data 11.1.1 Ways of backing up data • BACKUP function On the MMC CPU you will find a Centronics parallel interface (X122) to which you can connect a VALITEK streamer. With a streamer you can make a backup copy of all files on the hard disk (including the operating system and user da[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.2 General notes on data backup 11.1.2 General notes on data backup Loss of data occurs in case of • hardware defect on the module • hard disk defect • backup battery failure (loss of SRAM data) • withdrawal of modules CSB, NC CPU, MMC CPU • EMC influence Data range Hardware overview NCK DRAM not[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.2 General notes on data backup Overview of the data on the following modules: MMC CPU PLC CPU NCK CPU Hard disk DRAM Centronics V24 DRAM MPF SPF IKA2, 3 SW DRAM SRAM TEA1 TEA4 SEA RPA IKA1 ZOA TOA GIA DRAM SRAM TEA2 Clock/date SRAM User mem. Data mem. System data Oper. sys. Monitor NC keyboard PG PCIN Str[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.3 Saving / loading NCK data 11.1.3 Saving/loading NCK data Saving and loading RAM data from or to the hard disk Diagnosis General reset mode PLC general reset MMC disk User directories Local Global / Workpieces NC / Data Startup / Data Area, softkey Services NC, SAVE, LOAD Services NC, SAVE, LOAD Diagnosi[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.3 Saving / loading NCK data Procedure to save all RAM data on hard disk Use file names (not for MPF and SPF) and SK ”OK” to save MPF, SPF, TOA, SEA, ZOA and RPA data (without IKA) (take note of channel No.) Startup Diagnosis operating area Machine data Input window must appear at bottom Diagnosis oper[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.4 Data backup procedure via streamer 11.1.4 Data backup procedure via streamer Connect the streamer, insert tape without write protection Select ”Backup” ”Setup / configure” options ”Setup streamer type” Select type of streamer and tape Select ”Restore / Backup” Backup system (No. 2) 1) co[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.5 Restarting after MMC CPU replacement 11.1.5 Restarting after MMC CPU replacement Loading using the streamer (Restore) Control ”ON” after MMC CPU replacement MMC CPU without system software MMC CPU with system software Once reading in has been completed, switch system off and then on again Load PLC M[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.6 Loading via V24 interface or FD-E2 11.1.6 Loading via V24 interface or FD-E2 Example: Replacement of MMC CPU MMC software is loaded (same software version) Enter password for Diagnosis operating area Set date / time in Diagnosis operating area Connect external device Attention: FD-E2 requires booting fr[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) Procedure for loading data from hard disk (HD) to RAM areas, e.g. after battery or CSB failure. The sequence is also applicable for the first startup (series installation and startup). [...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) 19) SK ”Loading start” Loading standard PLC and TEA2, TEA4 cycle data !!!Data transfer from PC to NC in progress!!! 20) Cursor on Standard TEA2 TEA4 21) SK ”Loading from disk” 22) SK ”Loading start” 23) After completion of loading, pres[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) Drive machine data cannot be loaded while control is in general reset mode. Drive boot file with user data in binary format available on hard disk. Startup of 611D with TEA3 user data not required. 33) Select key position 0 on CSB Position for norm[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) Boot file generated Loading drive user data TEA3 Warning: Digital drives must be switched in! 39) SK ”Exit general reset mode” 40) SK ”Machine data” 41) SK ”Drive MD” 42) SK ”File functions” 43) Place cursor on required file 44) SK [...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.7 Loading from hard disk (control startup with user data) 3 Boot file generated Warning: If this SK is not pressed, all drive data will be lost after ”Power on”! 54) SK ”Loading from disk” 55) Set ”Drives” area via toggle switch 56) SK ”Loading start” 57) Press ”Recall” key 58) Vertica[...]

01.99 11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 11.1.8 CPU replacement 11.1.8 CPU replacement NCK CPU replacement Follow installation and startup instructions according to flow diagram ”Loading from hard disk” (Section 11.1.7). Note: PLC data need not be loaded. When replacing NCK CPU, items 8 to 14, 20 to 22 as well as 30, 31 and 37 to 63 do not apply.[...]

11 Data Backup / CPU Replacement 01.99 11.1.8 CPU replacement Start CPU replacement Yes Steps 1 to 7 Time and date After MMC CPU replacement Steps 8 to 66 No PLC CPU replacement NCK CPU replacement Forced booting NCK ”Power on” Loading PLC user data Position for normal operation PLC general reset Steps 11 to 15 Steps 30 to 31 Steps 33 to 35 Ste[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1 Leadscrew error compensation 6FC5 150-0AH01-0AA0 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1 Leadscrew error compensation 6FC5 150-0AH01-0AA0 12.1.1 Corresponding data • NC-MD 316* (Reference point pointer for + compensation) • NC-MD 320* (Reference point pointer for - compensation) • NC-MD 324* (Distance between 2 l[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.1.2 Functional description Feed motor Measuring equipment with resolver gearbox Spindle meter Leadscrew Ideal leadscrew pitch Spindle position Slide position Position measured (from measuring equipment) Actual leadscrew pitch Measuring error due to leadscrew error MD 6000 (4 comp. points per MD (8 bits) MD 6249 1[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Because compensation is not possible at the reference point, the error curve must be shifted so that the error is zero at the reference point. Error=0 Traverse path Pos. error Spacing Reference point Neg. error © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197- AA50 12–3 SINUMERIK 840C ([...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.1.2 Functional description The spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points (MD 324*) is then specified, being based on the permissible tolerance of the final (compensated) leadscrew error curve, the actual leadscrew pitch error and the number of possible compensating values. The following method for det[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description Traverse path Spacing Error=0 Pos. error Reference point Neg. error It is then specified how many compensating points must be supplied by means of the entered spacing between 2 leadscrew error compensation points and the end stops at the machine. Since leadscrew error compensation is on[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.1.2 Functional description 6000 Comp. point 4 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 3 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 2 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 1 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 5 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 8 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 12 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 996 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 1000 Yes / No + / - Comp. point 7 Y[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description 813 793 790 Spacing Tra- verse path Error=0 Pos. error Reference point Neg. error Example Axis 1 shows the error curve; no compensation points have been used as yet. Reference point value is 0 Max. - travel: - 35.000 mm Max. + travel: + 205.00 mm Tolerance band (prescribed by machine ma[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.1.2 Functional description K17 + K5 K16 K20 K24 Traverse path Error = 0 Pos. error Neg. error – + + K3 K6 – + Reference point Spacing Tolerance band e.g. 10 µ m Compensated curve Compensation value e.g. 5 µ m Commencing at the reference point and proceeding in a negative direction, the error curve runs to t[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.1.2 Functional description If the reference point is assigned to compensation point 793, breakdown of the 1000 compensation points is as follows: 1000 Comp. point 793 NC MD 6198 NC MD 316* 198 813 790 500 Comp. point 1 The reference point determines the location of the hatched area of the compensation points used[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.2 Rotary axis function 12.2 Rotary axis function 12.2.1 Corresponding data Same data as for linear axes, plus the following additional or supplementary data: • NC MD 344* (Rotary axis modulo value for leadscrew error compensation) • NC MD 5052* bit 0 (No automatic generation of G68) • NC MD 560* bit 7 (Actu[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.2.2 Functional description with calculation, and with G68, the programmed position is always approached over the shortest path. G68 is modal and belongs to the G90/91 group. If "modulo programming" is not activated, G68 is treated like G90. If the rotary axis is not to traverse over the shortest path, i[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.3 Endlessly rotating axis (SW 4 and higher) 12.3 Endlessly rotating axis (SW 4 and higher) 12.3.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 330 (dead time compensation for dwell) • NC MD 5024 Bit 1 (G200 after G [..] 105, G [..] 119) • NC MD 5025 Bit 1 (axis-specific G functions to PLC) • NC MD 5025 Bit 6 (activation of[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.3.2 Display of endlessly rotating axis 12.3.2 Display of endlessly rotating axis The actual value display is the same as that for a rotary axis, i.e. it is dependent on existent machine data, either absolute or modulo. The axis-specific G commands can be displayed in all operating modes. A new softkey "Axis-[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.4 Dwell in relation to axes or spindles 12.4 Dwell in relation to axes or spindles With certain technological processes (e.g. gear shaping / hobbing, etc.), a defined path (circular movement or relief cut) must be traversed when the final infeed is reached. The infeed axis must be retracted on completion of this [...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.4.2 Extension of dwell (SW 5 and higher) 12.4.2 Extension of dwell (SW 5 and higher) 12.4.2.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 330 (Deadtime compensation for dwell with reference to the axis actual value) • NC MD 332 (Deadtime compensation for dwell with reference to the axis setpoint) • NC MD 333 (Deadtime compe[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.5 Warm restart 12.5 Warm restart 12.5.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 360* (Axis valid in BAG) • NC MD 316* (Pointer for leadscrew error comp.) • NC MD 320* (Pointer for leadscrew error comp.) • NC MD 453* (Spindle valid in BAG) • NC MD 876 to 899 (Coupled axis groupings) • NC MD 5156 to 5183 (Coupled mo[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.5.2 Functional description No warm restart is required following modification of the following MD: • 104* TO area number (modification goes into force at once) • 304* IPO parameter name (modification accepted after each NC block) • 548* Name of horizontal axis ( " ) • 550* Name of perpendicular axis [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.6 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 12.6 Coordinate transformation 6FC5 150-0AD04-0AA0 Coordinate transformation TRANSMIT (implemented from software version 1 onwards) is used for face milling of turned parts (lathes). In order to implement this, a C axis and a powered milling cutter are required in a[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.2 Functional description 12.6.2 Functional description Whereas machine movements are executed in the real machine coordinate system, programming is carried out in the ficticious (Cartesian) coordinate system. Fictitious axes must be defined especially for the fictitious coordinate system. A fictitious axis can [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.6.2 Functional description For this reason, there is a transformation-specific value "Minimum velocity for Transmit" MD 738, 748, ... . The value is entered in units [IS] / IPO cycle. Tests have shown the value 10 to be a useful default value. Because the feedrate is not reduced further after a certain [...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.3 The transformation data set 12.6.3.1 Definition of machine data for coordinate transformation X n , Y n , Z n = rotated coordinates X, Y, Z = real coordinate system U, V, W = fictitious coordinate system , , x = angle of rotation Rotation through +Rotation through +Rotation through X The angle or real machine[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.6.3 The transformation data set NC MD 5060 to 5069 1st transformation data set NC MD 5070 to 5079 2nd transformation data set . . . NC MD 5130 to 5139 8th transformation data set Conditions for a transformation data set a) All axes and the channel must be assigned to the same operating mode group. b) The transfor[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.4 Transformation parameters 12.6.4 Transformation parameters 1st transformation, parameters 1 to 10 730 - 739 Default value Lower input value Upper input value Units 0 -99 999 999 99 999 999 units (IS) Active on Warm restart 2nd transformation, parameters 1 to 10 740 - 749 Default value Lower input value Upper [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.6.4 Transformation parameters Transformation parameters for 2D coordinate transformation Parameter 1: X shift of the real system in direction X relative to the fictitious origin a 1 [unit: units (IS)]. Parameter 2: Y shift of the real system in direction Y relative to the fictitious origin a 2 [unit: units (IS)].[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.4 Transformation parameters X n , Y n , Z n = rotated coordinates X, Y, Z = real coordinate system U, V, W = fictitious coordinate system , , x = angle of rotation (angle from MD) rotation through rotation through rotation through X Transformation parameters for transmit Parameter 9: (MD 738...) minimum speed f[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.6.5 Machine data for fictitious axes 12.6.5 Machine data for fictitious axes MD 224* Software limit switch MD 228* Software limit switch MD 232* Software limit switch MD 236* Software limit switch The software limit switch need not be input if the fictitious working area is outside the real possible working area,[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.6 NC PLC interface signals 12.6.6 NC PLC interface signals • In the case of fictitious axes, only the signals ”JOG, rapid overlay and handwheel 1,2 and the input interface” are processed. The output interface is neglected. The signal ”Reference point reached” is permanently set to 1. • The program i[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation • Fictitious axes must not be programmed in the reset position (G130, G230, G330) Alarm 2043. • A transformation may only be activated from the reset p[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.7 Explanation of the programming and operation of coordinate transformation • Transformation must not be selected or deselected within a contour block sequence. • Block search with calculation to a program part where transformation is active is permitted. • The automatic block search to a program part whe[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8.1 Example of TRANSMIT coordinate transformation A transformation data set for the TRANSMIT transformation must be defined as follows: NC MD 5060 Channel number of the transformation Example: 0000 0010 (binary form) (chan[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8.2 Example of 2D coordinate transformation A transformation data set for 2D coordinate transformation must be defined as follows: NC MD 5060 Channel number of the transformation Example: 0000 0010 (binary form) (channel 2) NC MD 5061 G Function for transformation se[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.6.8 Examples of coordinate transformation 12.6.8.3 Example of 3D coordinate transformation A transformation data set for 3D coordinate transformation must be defined as follows: NC MD 5060 Channel number of the transformation Example : 0000 0010 (binary form) (channel 2) NC MD 5061 G Function for transformation s[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.6.8 Transformation machine data change without warm restart 12.6.9 Transformation machine data change without warm restart Corresponding data Machine data • NC MD 5017 bit 6 Transformation machine data change permitted during active transformation • NC MD 5017 bit 7 Transformation machine data change effectiv[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.7 Spindle functions 12.7 Spindle functions 12.7.1 Overview The following spindle functions are available: • Speed-controlled spindle • Oriented spindle stop • Position-controlled spindle (C axis) The individual spindle functions are produced with the following spindle modes : • Control mode Spindle rotate[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.1 Overview The diagram "Structure of spindle control" provides an overview of the functions available and also the flow of data and commands. Data flows in the direction indicated: Setpoints and control data Actual values and status data Switching commands Status Structure of spindle control CONTROL U[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes The following is a description of the various modes in which the spindle may be operated. The individual modes can be programmed by NC (part program MDA, overstore), PLC or command channel (CC). The functions that are then available are [...]

03.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Gear ratio changing Gear ratio changing is only possible in the open-loop control mode. There can be up to eight different ratios between motor and spindle. A permitted range of speed can be laid down for each gear ratio by defining maximum and minimum speed values. If the spe[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 12.7.2.2 Oscillation mode The oscillation mode can be used with gear ratio changing to facilitate engagement of the gear by oscillating the spindle. When switching from open-loop control to oscillation control, the speed setpoint is first reduced to zero at the deceleration ra[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Selecting the positioning mode Positioning mode can be selected by NC, PLC or command channel. The following functions are available: PLC: Request for M19 • IS:POSITION SPINDLE – set position from MD 452* CC: Request for M19tsr • ”Incremental spindle positioning” fun[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes When there is a request from the NC or PLC, the corresponding machine data of the active gear ratio is used, which is: – MD 427* to 434* ”Creep speed for M19” as max. speed during positioning – MD 478* to 485* ”Acceleration time constant with position control” for [...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Example for case 1a Example Actual position: 315° Programmed position: 90° Shortest path: +135° 0° b) Spindle running The spindle is driven to the specified position as quickly as possible, without changing the direction of rotation. The nearest position at which the spind[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Speed characteristic for case 1b (actual speed < creep speed) n t Creep speed for M19 Speed at beginning of positioning Beginning of positioning Speed characteristic for case 1b (actual speed creep speed) n t Creep speed for M19 Speed at beginning of positioning Beginning o[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Example for case 1b 0° Example Actual position: 315° Actual rotation: positive Programmed position: 90° Nearest position at which spindle can be stopped: 270° Distance to be traversed in addition to the deceleration distance: +180° Total distance to be traversed: +495° 2[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Speed characteristic for case 2 n t Creep speed for M19 Recognition of zero mark The following applies when selecting the creep speed: The drive must have sufficient acceleration reserves in the speed range below the creep speed, corresponding to the programmed acceleration fo[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Speed characteristic for incremental positioning t n Max. speed from DB user data Examples Example 1 0° Last M19 position: 0° Actual position: 270° Specified travel: +180° This means that the spindle has moved 90° from the last M19 position in the opposite direction to th[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Example 2 0° last M19 position: 90° Actual position: 0° Specified travel: –180° The spindle has thus moved 90° from the last M19 position in the specified direction, so the total is Distance to be traversed: –90° 12–46 © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Gain factor change In the positioning mode it must be possible to drive the spindle to a target position from full speed under position feedback control. The spindle must be held at the target position even when there is drift. To ensure that the spindle is steady at rest, eve[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Referring to the SIMODRIVE 650 Operating Instructions will explain the following: P-54: Normalization factor for set speeds (M19 mode) Terminal for M19: Terminal configurable with P-83 to P-85 The block diagram shows that MD 469* and the SIMODRIVE parameter P-54 must add up to[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Aborting the positioning mode The specified position is regarded as having been reached (or the distance as having been traversed) when the spindle is within the position window. This is signalled to the PLC by setting IS:SPINDLE POSITION REACHED. The position is held under po[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes At speeds (n) above rated speed (nn), the drive acceleration capability decreases in relation to the speed. Immediately above rated speed nn, there is a range of "constant power" in which the torque (and thus also the acceleration capability) drop in proportion to 1 [...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes In main spindle drives, the torque is limited as follows (cf. Fig. 1): • Constant torque up to rated speed n n : Torque = const • Constant power above rated speed up to breakdown speed n k : Torque 1 / n • Power reduction at higher speeds up to n max : Torque 1 / (n*n) A[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes When speed n x is set to the same value as limit speed n max or when "0" (default setting) is input, the acceleration characteristic is the same as that obtained with previous software versions, i.e. without characteristic curvature (break point above maximum speed).[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes 12.7.2.4 C axis mode General In the C axis mode the spindle is operated as a position-controlled rotary axis . As such, it can be included in the interpolation with other axes (e.g. TRANSMIT coordinate transforma- tion). General notes: • Feed STOP is not displayed if a C axi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Selection and deselection of the C axis mode Selection and deselection of the C axis mode is effected by the NC system (part program, MDA, overstore) with customer-specific M functions. The numbers of the functions are stored in the machine data (MD 260, 261). The address exte[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Synchronizing and referencing The reference systems for the spindle and the associated C axis should always be identical. A parameterized shift of the zero mark (MD 459*) is taken into account. Both systems have the absolute position 0 at the position determined by the zero ma[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes • With rotary axes it is usually unnecessary to monitor software limit switches. If monitoring is required for a C axis, an explicit reference point approach must be performed. • The alarm "Excessive feed" is triggered if the cutoff frequency of the C axis encode[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Parking axis If a C axis is assigned to a spindle via MD 461*, axis-specific interface signals (DB 32) are also evaluated. Two axis-specific signals in particular should be mentioned here that have feedback effects on spindle operation. The measuring circuit monitoring functio[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Initiating the C axis mode This section describes various methods of changing over to the C axis mode. The standard method The C axis is referenced automatically when the spindle is synchronized (passing the zero mark of the spindle encoder). When the C axis mode is selected, [...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Example: • Spindle / C axis with double-track encoder • One motor for both modes (one setpoint output) • In this example, the actual values from the two encoder tracks show the same direction of rotation, which means that MD 564*, bit 2 and MD 520* bit 1 have to have the[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Encoder-specific resolution Any type of encoder for actual value acquisition (e.g. digital encoders with any pulse rate, SIPOS signal generators) can be used for spindles controlled by 32-bit servo CPUs. When SIPOS signal generators are used, employing the pulse multiplication[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Possible configurations for the C axis mode The machine data listed below must be entered for configuring the interfaces and for format interfacing between actual value, internal computing resolution and setpoint A more detailed description of this machine data will be found i[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Configuration with one encoder Setpoint C axis Setpoint spindle Actual value Spindle and C axis Spindle Gear ratios Drive actuator M Configuration with two encoders or one double-track encoder Actual value C axis Actual value spindle Setpoint C axis Setpoint spindle M Spindle [...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.7.2 Description of the spindle modes Relevance of machine data bits for sign inversion Setpoint/actual value for spindle + C axis The following machine data are affected: MD 564*, bit 1: "Sign inversion setpoint" MD 564*, bit 2: "Sign inversion actual value" MD 520*, bit 1: "Sign inversio[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.8 Following error compensation for thread cutting 12.8 Following error compensation for thread cutting This function is used to correct the starting angle of the spindle by the calculated following error. This is to ensure that the same number of thread turns is cut at a high speed as at a low speed. The offset c[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.8.1 Multiple thread Example: Three-start thread (each offset by 120 degrees) G01 G90 X50 S200 M3 L F Starting point G92 A0 X100 L F 1st thread start (0 degrees) : X50 L F Starting point G92 A120 X100 L F 2nd thread start (120 degrees) : X50 L F Starting point G92 A240 X100 L F 3rd thread start (240 degrees) : 12.[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.9 Thread cutting position controlled spindle (SW 2 and higher) 12.9 Thread cutting position controlled spindle (SW 2 and higher) The function THREAD CUTTING POSITION-CONTROLLED SPINDLE is an option. 12.9.1 Corresponding data • Option bit • NC MD 1320* 1260* 1324* 108* 521* bit 4 • Signal DB 10 - 13 DR 13 bi[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function 12.9.2.1 Switching on the function Two G functions are required for the ”Thread cutting position-controlled spindle” function: G36: Thread cutting, position controlled spindle (rigid tapping) G36 is modal and belongs to the following G group: Internal G group division with @ 36b: I[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.9.2 Description of function G98 F... Leading feedrate for a rotary axis in rev/min. The path feedrate is calculated internally on the basis of the leading feedrate of the path axes involved. G98 is modal and belongs to the following G group: Internal G group division with @ 36b: Internal G group 11 G functions 94[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.2 Description of function Example for thread on a cylindrical workpiece: N10 ... (Switch spindle to rotary axis mode) N20 G0 C30 Z2 (Position rotary axis to 30 degrees, position Z = 2 mm; corresponds to thread insertion point) N30 G36 C Z-30 K5 F1000 (Thread lead 5 mm / revolution, clockwise; feedrate of C axis[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.9.2 Description of function The thread lead is programmed under address K (I, J). The sign in front of K shows the direction of rotation (see example above). Clockwise / counterclockwise rotation is defined in the Programming Guide in the section Coordinate systems. A lead must be assigned to the individual axes [...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.9.6 Reading in G functions 12.9.6 Reading in G functions G functions G36 and G98 can be read by the user with FB69 via the PLC and with @36b from the NC program. 12.9.7 Interface signal DB 10 - DB 13 2) , bit 4 ”Thread cutting position controlled spindle” (Rigid tapping) 76543210 Bit No. Byte address DR 13 G3[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.10.1 Rapid block change using FIFO function (up to SW 2 only) The next part program blocks are temporarily stored in this FIFO memory in a prepared state (predecoded). Only when the memory is full with such preprocessed blocks is the program started or continued. The NC can now access the prepared blocks in the F[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.10.2 Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) 12.10.2 Control of predecoding (SW 5 and higher) 12.10.2.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 5052* bit 6 Programmed predecoding with G171 / G172 • Maximum number of predecoded blocks • Real number of predecoded blocks Function description With the introduction of block[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.11 Absolute encoder 12.11 Absolute encoder 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 12.11.1.1 Functions The SIPOS encoder system consists of a multiturn absolute encoder which functions absolutely when switched on and incrementally during operation. To reduce the dimensions of the encoder, part of the encoder el[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 12.11.1.3 Synchronizing the absolute encoder with the machine absolute system After installation or after replacing the absolute encoder, the measuring system must be synchronized with the machine system in the same way as with any incremental system. The absolute encoder is[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 Case 1: NC MD 1808* bit 3 = 0 If the bit "Absolute offset valid" is not set, reference point approach is executed as for an axis without absolute encoder. With "Reference point reached", the calculated absolute offset is transferred to the axial NC MD 396[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 • Setting up without a reference point Where there is no reference cam, e.g. for reasons of cost. NC MD 1808* bit 0 = 1 is set, i.e. a SIPOS absolute encoder is installed. The machine is traversed manually in "JOG" or "incremental" mode to the customer?[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 12.11.1.4 What happens on warm restart (POWER ON) When NC MD 1808* bit 0 "Axis with absolute encoder" is set, NC MD 1808* bit 3 "Absolute offset valid" is checked for the relevant bits. If both bits are set, the axis-specific interface signal "Refere[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 Comments • NC MD 1808* bit 3: – Software limit switch and leadscrew error compensation are enabled. – The leadscrew error between the reference point and the absolute position are included in the calculation. • Reference point approach with a SIPOS absolute encoder i[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 11.92 12.11.1 SIPOS absolute encoder up to SW 4 12.11.1.7 SIPOS absolute encoder errors With SIPOS, errors can occur in the encoder as well as in the absolute submodule located on the HMS measuring circuit module. Please note that a faulty connection between the encoder and the absolute submodule can trigger nearly all th[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Relevant machine data and alarms • NC-MD 1264* Grid spacing / EnDat measuring step for linear scale • NC MD 1804* bit 0 Symmetrical traversing range for ENDAT absolute encoder • NC MD 1808* bit 0 Axis with abs[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.2 Hardware requirements The ENDAT absolute encoder can only be used in conjunction with the new digital SIMODRIVE 611D modules ”Standard and performance”. Order No.: 6SN1118-0DM13-0AA0 2-axis version (Standard) Order No.: 6SN1118-0DG23-0AA0 1-axis versio[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Lin. incremental measuring step = = * = 0.002384 µ m Linear grid spacing Pulse multiplication 10 mm 2048 1 4 * 512 The position controller resolution is coarser than the linear incremental measuring step and therefore determines the positioning accuracy. If the inc[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.4 Special features for large traversing ranges For the linear absolute scale LC 181, the traversing range is predefined through the length of the built-on scale. An overflow of the absolute value of the encoder EQN 1325 occurs after 4096 revolutions. This me[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Function extension of the symmetrical traversing range for rotary axes (as from SW 6) General In the case of rotary axes with EnDat absolute encoders and up to SW 5, a position between 0 and 360 degrees or between 0 and 16 revolutions was calculated (depending on MD[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.5 Offset of the absolute encoder from the machine absolute system On initial installation or after replacement of the absolute encoder, the offset of the measuring system zero to the machine zero must be ascertained or set. • Relevant machine data: NC MD 2[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Type 1: NC MD 1808* bit 3, absolute offset valid, = 0 If the bit is not set, referencing is performed like on an axis without the absolute encoder using the BERO proximity switch as the reference point encoder. The absolute offset is calculated automatically from th[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) Example: Position controller resolution = 0.5 10 -4 mm Displayed actual position = 140.0000 Positive travel direction Reference point approach is not possible! 1st step Enter 40.0000 mm in NC MD 396*, absolute offset, and set NC MD 1808*, bits 1 and 3. 2nd step Afte[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) It must be taken into account that all absolute values have the format± 99.999.999 input units: In order to be able to enter a larger absolute offset, bit 1 must be set in NC MD 1808*. When this bit is set, the absolute value of 99.999.999 must be deducted from the[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.2.6 Behaviour on power on) If NC MD 1808* bit 0 is set the NC MD 1808* bit 3 ”Absolute offset valid” is checked for the corresponding axes. If both bits are set, the axis-specific interface signal ”Reference point reached” is already set on power-on. 1[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.3 Range extension with ENDAT absolute encoder (as from SW 6) Each time the absolute encoder is evaluated (Power On or deselection of parking axis), both MD 396*, absolute offset, and the rough encoder position are used to determine the actual position. The absolute offset must have been declared active (MD 180[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.11.3 Range extension with ENDAT absolute encoder (as from SW 6) NC MD 3944* The rough encoder position in NC-MD 3944* currently being used is stored at the following times: • When an NC-MD file is stored (all NC-MD) • On NCK Power On • When ”Parking axis” is deselected. Linear axes, encoder on motor The[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.3.3 First start-up Initial state Initial state standard MD MD 1808*, bit 3=0 Absolute offset not valid MD 1808*, bit 7=0 No range extension MD 1808*, bit 0=0 No absolute encoder exists MD 3944*=0 Rough encoder position=0, no overflow MD 3940*=0 Gear denominato[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.11.2 ENDAT absolute encoder (SW 5.2 and higher) 12.11.3.4 Special start-up cases Start-up after a SW update The rough encoder position is not erased when the software is updated. The absolute encoder does not therefore have to be reinstalled. Foreseeable SRAM failures Foreseeable SRAM failures occur, for example,[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12 Path dimension from PLC 12.12 Path dimension from PLC General notes You can traverse NC axes directly from the PLC user program via the command channel. Machine control (control response, traverse response) and the displays of the NC remain unchanged. 12.12.1 Execution of the function ” Path dimension from t[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.12.1 Execution of the function "Path dimension from the PLC" Manual traverse commands (traverse keys) are ignored while the path dimension is being traversed from the PLC. If G68 is passed down the command channel, the path dimension on a rotary axis is traversed along the shortest path (< 180°). Th[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.4 Meaning of NC MD 5008, bit 7 12.12.4 Meaning of NC MD 5008, bit 7 Bit 7=0: Path dimension is started in the AUT/MDA modes only in the NC stop/RESET state (read-in disable and end of block have no meaning). Bit 7=1: Path dimension is started in NC stop/RESET state or on read-in disable and end of block. Defau[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC The path dimension is traversed if the disabling commands are cancelled and all required enabling commands present. The REPOS offset is updated whenever a program is interrupted in the AUTOMATIC mode and a path dimension then traversed. 12.12[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC If a path dimension is passed down the command channel, the NC traverses the path dimension as a fixed destination as in INC and REPOS modes. This applies whatever mode has been selected at the machine control panel. If the path dimension has[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC Comments: • Keys / switches on the machine control panel: Direction keys, rapid traverse overlay, axis selector switch have no effect. • Feedrate override switch: The switch position 0% is always active for path dimension, irrespective of[...]

11.92 12 Functional Descriptions 12.12.5 Influence of the modes on the path dimension function from the PLC • Software limit switch (SW-L): The following effects occur: SW-L SW-L SW-L SW-L The path dimension is traversed The path dimension is not traversed and aborted The path dimension is not traversed and aborted The path dimension is traversed[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.13 Indexing function from the PLC 12.13 Indexing function from the PLC Corresponding data • MD 244* 1104* 1108* 1112* MD 564* bit 3 MD 564* bit 4 MD 5018 bit 4, division from PLC (this bit must be set to 1, otherwise the indexing axis is not activated) • General • Division in set-up mode • Division from t[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.1 Division in set-up mode 12.13.1 Division in set-up mode With this function the indexing positions are traversed incrementally in set-up modes INC and JOG. INC mode (incremental dimension) The indexing axis is traversed incrementally by one division when the traversing key ”+” or ”–” is operated. Th[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.13.2 Division from the PLC Preparatory function Rotary axis Linear axis G68 Positioning to division number along shortest direction of rotation within 360° Limit: 1 to number of divisions – – – ND = Number of Divisions DRD = Division Reference Dimension 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms Number[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms Significance of number of divisions and division reference dimension ND = Number of Divisions DRD = Division Reference Dimension Rotary axis: ND = 7 DRD = 360 degrees Input resolution : 10 -3 1 2 3 DRD ND / 360.000° 7 4 5 6 Linear axis: ND = 5 DRD = 1000 mm Input resol[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.13.3 Explanation of indexing function terms Example: Number of divisions = 6 Rotary axis Division reference dimension= 360 · 10 3 mdegrees 1 2 3 60° Division offset= 90000 mdegrees 4 5 6 120° 240° 300° 0° 180° 90° ND This offset becomes active as soon an the machine data has been altered. Incremental divi[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.4 Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” 12.13.4 Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” NC MD 1104*: Name : Number of divisions (ND) Significance : Number of divisions per reference dimension Standard value : 0 Input value limit : 1 ... 999 Reference system : -[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.13.4 Machine data for the function ”Setup mode division related” NC MD 564* bit 4: Name : Indexing axis Significance : The indexing functions apply to this axis. The axis can be a rotary or linear axis. Bit 4 = 0 : Axis is not an indexing axis Bit 4 = 1 : Axis is an indexing axis Standard value : Bit 4 = 0 (f[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.5 Traversing an indexing axis to the reference point 12.13.5 Traversing an indexing axis to the reference point If the function is used machine-specifically , the indexing axis can be traversed to an indexing-specific reference point. The distance between a zero mark and an indexing position can be defined in [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.13.6 Monitoring 12.13.6 Monitoring Monitoring reacts to illegal MD input values for division: Permissible input values are: • Number of divisions : 1 ... 999 • Reference dimension linear axis : 1 ... 99 99 999 • Offset linear axis : + / - 1 ... 99 999 999 rotary axis : + / - 360 degrees Otherwise alarm 1200[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.7 Actual value display • The division counter display is shown in the following example (example for display resolution 10 E - 3 mm). 99999.123 CC The places after the decimal point are used to check travel and to display a non-division position The number of displayed decimal places after the point depends [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.13.8 PLC user interface 12.13.8 PLC user interface The parameters for the command channel can be set via two interfaces: a) User interface UI in the permenantly set data block DB 41 b) Any DB or DX set by the user in which the parameters for the function triggered in the NC are entered. The user must enter functi[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.13.10 Error messages from the NC to the PLC 12.13.10 Error messages from the NC to the PLC Indexing from the PLC is via the command channel. If disturbances occur while this function is being executed, an error message is sent to the user interface. The error messages are divided into general and function-specifi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.14.1 Feedforward control 12.14.1 Feedforward control The FEEDFORWARD CONTROL function is an option. 12.14.1.1 Corresponding data NC MD 312* P-component feedforward control for axes NC MD 465* P-component feedforward control spindle NC MD 1260* P-component feedforward control for rigid tapping NC MD 1124* D-compon[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.14.1 Feedforward control Setpoint smoothing A position overshoot may occur even when the dynamic feedforward control setting is correct. In this case, an additional PT1 element (setpoint smoothing filter) can be used to slightly flatten the position setpoint ramps or to smooth the setpoint peaks so that the posit[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.15 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) 12.15 Switchover measuring system 1 or 2 (SW 2 and higher) 12.15.1 Corresponding data NC MD 200* 1st measuring system connection NC MD 220* Backlash compensation 1st measuring system Spindle MD 400* Measuring system connection Spindle MD 461* Assigned C axis[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.15.3 Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm processing 12.15.3 Measuring circuit monitoring and alarm processing • The functions pulse code monitoring and zero monitoring are either active or inactive for both measuring systems (selection made via MD 1820*, bit 1 and 6). If an error is detected in one of the tw[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.16 Quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and higher) 12.16 Quadrant error compensation (SW 2 and higher) 12.16.1 Corresponding data MD 1232* Compensation value in range 2 1236* Comensation time constant 1240* Compensation value in range 4 1244* Upper limit range 1 (a 1 ) 1248* Upper limit range 2 (a 2 ) 1252* Upper l[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation 12.16.3 Installation The compensation value of the QEC essentially depends on the machine configuration. The easiest way to install QEC is to carry out a circularity test. With a circularity test, deviations from the programmed radius when a circle is described can be measured and displayed grap[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.16.3 Installation 12.16.3.1 Installation without adaptation characteristic The installation is carried out in two stages. In stage one, the QEC without adaptation (MD 1804*, bit 6 = 1) is derived. Two parameters (compensating amplitude and compensation time constant) can be altered. These two parameters are each [...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation Figure 3 Radius deviations at the quadrant crossover points with insufficient compensation II IV I Counter 1 Counter 2 III If the compensating amplitude is too high, the circularity test clearly shows the overcompensation of the radius deviations at the quadrant crossover points (see Figure 4). [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.16.3 Installation Figure 5 Compensation time constant too small II IV I Counter 1 Counter 2 III If the value for the compensation time constant chosen for the circularity test is too high, we see that the radius deviation at the quadrant transition points is compensated for (it is assumed that the optimum compens[...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.16.3 Installation 12.16.3.2 Installation with adaptation characteristic If the compensation is acceleration dependant, a characteristic must be determined in a second stage. The required compensation amplitudes for differend radii and velocities are determined, the effect of the compensating amplitudes checked in[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.16.3 Installation The acceleration values are derived from | a | = v 2 / r from the radius and travel velocity. The acceleration value can easily be varied using the override switch. Before entering these acceleration values a 3 , a 2 and a 1 in machine data 1244*, 1248* and 1252*, it may be necessary to convert [...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.17 Axis converter / spindle converter (SW 2 and higher) 12.17 Axis converter / spindle converter (SW 2 and higher) 12.17.1 Corresponding data • SDD 600* 602* 604* 606* 608* 610* 612* 626* 628* 630* 632* SD 540* bit 0 • MD 304* 548* 550* 552* 568* General The function axis/spindle converter implements the assi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 06.93 12.17.2 Axis converter These setting data can be altered via @311, @312, @411, @412 @ / PLC / RS 232 C (V24). The status active / inactive of the axis converter is stored in SD 540* bit 0. Conversion functions are active in AUTOMATIC, MDA and TEACH-IN modes but not with overstore. In the following machine data 304* [...]

06.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.17.3 Spindle converter These setting data can be altered via @311, @312, @411, @412 @ / PLC / RS 232 C (V24). The spindle converter is only active in AUTOMATIC, TEACH-IN and MDA modes but not with overstore. The AUTOMATIC basic display does not show that the spindle converter is active. 12.17.3.2 Programming 1) T[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.18 Functional description of gearbox interpolation (up to SW 3) 12.18 Functional description of gearbox interpolation (up to SW 3) The functionality GEARBOX INTERPOLATION (GI) is subdivided into the following 3 options: • GI full package with the full range of functions described below • Gantry axes with rest[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.1 Corresponding data PLC user interface • Data block DB29 for axes • Data block DB31 for spindles 12.18.2 Brief description of GI functions The gearbox interpolation (GI) function replaces mechanical gear couplings (gears and differentials) on the basis of software functionality and single-axis drives. The[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.2 Brief description of GI functions Leading drives / Following drives Following drive Compensatory controller Parallel model following drive K F 1 K F 2 K F 3 K F 4 K F 5 K F 1 K F 2 K F 3 K F 4 K F 5 Setpoint FA overlay Setpoint LD 1 Setpoint LD 2 Setpoint LD 3 Setpoint LD 4 Setpoint LD 5 Actual value LD 1 Ac[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.3 Operating principle 12.18.3 Operating principle Several gearbox interpolation groupings can be operated simultaneously in the SINUMERIK 840 C system. In principle, every real axis or spindle in the system can be defined as a following drive. Likewise, every real or simulated axis or spindle may act as a lead[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 12.18.4.1 Setpoint link When position-controlled leading drives are used, the command variable for the following drive can be derived from the part setpoints of the leading drives, thus ensuring a better response to dynamic con[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor 12.18.4.2 Actual value link The setpoint link described above cannot be used in some cases. This applies particularly to leading and following drives which differ greatly in terms of dynamic response or to leading drives, such as spindles which are not position-controlled[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.4 Link types with constant link factor For normal operating conditions, it is advisable to operate only one leading axis with K4 link; this will generally be the least well tuned axis(disturbances in measurement or closed-loop control) or the axis with the slowest dynamic response (e.g. main spindle). It must [...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.5 Curve-gearbox interpolation (CGI) (SW 4 and higher) 12.18.5 Curve-gearbox interpolation (CGI) (SW 4 and higher) The "Curve-gearbox interpolation" function is available as an option. 12.18.5.1 General The curve-gearbox interpolation option allows an IKA curve to be overlaid on a following axis invol[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.5 Curve-gearbox interpolation (CGI) (SW 4 and higher) The R parameter can be either the output quantity of an IKA positioned upstream (cascade) or any other quantity which is assigned a default value or changed from the process (PLC) or the part program. Input A can be additionally weighted by means of T No. 1[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.5 Curve-gearbox interpolation (CGI) (SW 4 and higher) Link types of GI / IKA link structures Link type GI/IKA link types FA position input is linked to Output of link branch is connected to GI link branch with: K1 Setpoint position link (and possibly actual position link via com- pensatory controller) Setpoint[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 03.95 12.18.6 Variable cascading of GI following drives (SW 4 and higher) 12.18.6 Variable cascading of GI following drives (SW 4 and higher) Note: The user must always make sure that the ring is never completely closed at any time; the error message "NC-CPU timeout" (3085) will be output if the ring is closed w[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.8 Following drive overlays 12.18.8 Following drive overlays When the LINK ON gear link is activated, the following drive follows the movements of the leading drives according to the link factors entered. At the same time, i.e. when LINK ON is active, the following drive can be traversed with an additional over[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.8 Following drive overlays The overlay path FD is calculated on the basis of the present actual positions and the specified synchronous positions; this path is then transferred to the following drive as an incremental overlay path. FD= (FD syn - FD act ) + KF1*(LD1 act - LD1 syn ) + KF2* (LD2 act - LD2 syn ) +[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.10 Block search 12.18.10 Block search Block search is only meaningful if executed with calculation. The GI commands are in this case executed as in normal program mode, i.e. the GI status is established as if the system were operating in normal program mode. Exception: On-the-fly synchronization is not execute[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.11 GI monitors 12.18.11.1 Monitoring for maximum velocity/speed and maximum acceleration The velocity / speed of the following drive is limited to a maximum velocity value (MD 280* or 403*-410*) 1) . With an unfavourable constellation, the following drive may be influenced by the leading drives such that it wo[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors The velocity warning threshold is input as a percentage value of the maximum velocity (NC MD 280* or 403*-410*) in NC MD 1448* / 494*. 1) The interface signal VELOCITY/SPEED WARNING THRESHOLD REACHED is automatically reset when the following drive velocity drops below 7/8 of the warning threshol[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.01 12.18.11 GI monitors Characteristic of the velocity setpoint with the characteristic rising above and falling below the warning threshold n FA approx.20% approx.10% control reserve MD 264* Drive error threshold MD 268* max.setpoint (IPO STOP) MD 1736*-1764* Alarm limit velocity: 1st PaSa - 8thPaSa (param. set) MD 14[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors n FA Tipo Tipo MD 336<>0 MD 336=0 V set V act Tipo Leading axis v LA v set v set · MD335 Following axis MD 1448* Warning thresh. max Hysteresis threshold= 7 / 8 · MD1448* Enabling/disabling of axes and spindles for velocity/acceleration limitation Dependent on the actual machining situat[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.18.11 GI monitors 12.18.11.2 Fine/coarse synchronism In the LINK ACTIVE state, the interface signal SYNCHRONISM FINE or SYNCHRONISM COARSE indicates that the present setpoint position and setpoint velocity of the following drive is within the tolerance window specified by means of machine data. For this purpose, [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.11 GI monitors 12.18.11.5 HW/SW limit switches of following drive If the following axis traverses beyond an HW or SW limit switch, then an internal limit switch is simulated for all leading axes depending on the sign of K ü . The effect is the same as if every leading axis had traversed into contact with an S[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.11 GI monitors 12.18.11.6 Special features relating to following axes • If a following axis cannot execute its traversing motion in the LINK ON state because certain enabling signals (controller enable, etc.) are missing, then the active leading axes and leading spindles defined in the GI grouping are also s[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming If a following spindle is programmed, the only possible leading spindle must also be programmed. If a link motion on the part of the leading spindle is not desired, then a link factor of "0" must be specified. The gearbox interpolation can be programmed from various sources and also co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.12 Programming General information about programming • When a GI function is programmed, the following block is not read in until the GI request of the preceding block has been fully executed. The ultimate response of the control system to block changes can be influenced by means of machine data (NC MD 1848*[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming • The defined gearbox configuration is maintained in the following events: – End of block – End of program – Change of operating mode – Warm start – Power off • Reconfiguration of the GI grouping can be prevented by appropriately setting NC MD 1844* / 525*. • The link between a l[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.12 Programming • NC MD 1852* / 527* can be set such that tool length compensation, zero offsets and the preset / DRF values are calculated into the synchronous position of the following drive. It is also possible to specify the reference system in which the synchronous positions must be programmed. (Only for[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.12 Programming A gearbox chain must not be closed in the active state, i.e. if a chain is defined such that a following drive at the end is also acting as the leading drive at the start of the chain, then it is strictly illegal for all links to be active at the same time. The user must take measures via the PL[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13 Start-up Before commencing start-up of the GI grouping, you must complete the start-up procedure described in the Section headed "Start-up of axis (analog) and spindle". 12.18.13.1 Brief start-up of a GI grouping • Declare the desired following axis/spindle as a following drive[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13.2 Full start-up procedure Step Action Important information 1 Define position control sampling time Following drive and associated leading drives must generally have the same position control sampling times. 2 Set drift compensation (applies only to analog drives) Deactivate feedforward co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13 Start-up Before commencing start-up of the GI grouping, you must complete the start-up procedure described in the Section headed "Start-up of axis (analog) and spindle". 12.18.13.1 Brief start-up of a GI grouping • Declare the desired following axis/spindle as a following drive[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up 12.18.13.2 Full start-up procedure Step Action Important information 1 Define position control sampling time Following drive and associated leading drives must generally have the same position control sampling times. 2 Set drift compensation (applies only to analog drives) Deactivate feedforward co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.13 Start-up Set position control sampling times The position control sampling times for the following drive and associated leading drives within a GI grouping must be set to the same value. This sampling time may however vary from grouping to grouping (provided the groupings are not chained as a gearbox). By i[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up General optimization of axes and spindles • Axes: You must set all axes in the GI grouping according to the optimization instructions in the Start-up Guide (section headed "Drive optimization"). It is particularly important that the set servo gain factor corresponds to the actual servo [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.13 Start-up • If the drives involved have varying dynamic response characteristics (and if it is not meaningful to match them by setting the same response values), then you can use a setpoint filter for the purpose of matching. You can activate the setpoint filter for axes with NC MD 1820*, bit 0; you must e[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up K v 1 =33.33 s -1 V 1 =0.66 T SYM 1 =5 ms 1-0.66 T SUBS 1 = –––––––+5 ms=15 ms 33.33 K v 2 =33.33s -1 V 2 =0.66 T SYM 2 =5 ms 1-0.66 T SUBS 2 = –––––––+5 ms=15 ms 33.33 K v 2 =25.00s -1 V 3 =0.66 T SYM 3 =7 ms 1-0.66 T SUBS 3 = –––––––+7 ms=20.2 ms 25 T X 1[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.13 Start-up Optimization of the compensatory controller When it is activated, the compensatory controller basically increases the servo gain factor of the following drive. However, if the axis or spindle-specific servo gain factor of the following drive is already set to the maximum value, the following drive [...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up The following servo gain factor settings are recommended: FD-KV Drv (NC MD252* / 435*..442*) = 1 1) FD-KV CC (NC MD1420* / 487*) = FD-KV max -1 1) Please note, however, that only FD-KV Drv (NC MD252*/435*..442*) remains active in the LINK OFF state. If the following drive must contribute to the exe[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.13 Start-up While the following axis is traversing, the positional difference for synchronism (contour deviation FD) should be approximately 0, otherwise the time constant needs to be re- optimized. • Re-optimizing the time constant of the parallel model: – Change machine data "Time constant parallel [...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.13 Start-up Effect of the input values in NC MD 1432* / 495* (case distinction): 0: No controlled follow-up; immediate normal follow-up 1...15000: Controlled follow-up initially; switchover to normal follow-up on expiry of delay 15001 and higher: Controlled follow-up at all times Definition of "Controlled[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.13 Start-up Setting the interlocks To complete the start-up procedure, you now need to set or reset the interlock or enable bits for certain GI functionalities according to the machine manufacturer's data. The following settings are available: • NC MD 1456* / 496* Default setting of link structure • N[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation Selection • Before synchronous operation is selected, the CONTROLLER ENABLE signal must be present for both spindles. If this signal is not present, the reaction is as follows: – No switchover to synchronous operation takes place – No alarm is output – The bloc[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation • The same drive may not be configured as the following drive as a C-axis and a spindle in two GI groupings at the same time. • Synchronous operation is not cancelled when the operating mode is changed or after RESET. • The system limits the speed of the leading [...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation • Gear stage switchover and the transfer of new actual gear stages are not possible in synchronous operation. Synchronous spindle in mechanically coupled operation When a pair of synchronous spindles is operated with clamped workpiece, certain factors including • t[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation 12.18.14.2 Gantry axes; machines with forced coupling Several gantry axis pairs can be configured if only the "Gantry axis" option is set. The selected gearbox interpolation type is subject to the following restrictions: – Only one leading axis permitted pe[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation The following interlocks are effective: • Inhibition of reconfiguration (axis 1844*) • Inhibition of link factor switchover (axis 1844*) • Inhibition of synchronizing position switchover (axis 1844*) • INTERLOCK LINK OFF (interface signal) To ensure that the li[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation Flowchart for PLC-controlled reference point approach Activate control Activate GI grouping 1 Selection ref. point mode Initiate reference point approach with leading axis X1 (following axis X follows X1) Reference point reached? Deactivate GI grouping 1 Activate GI gr[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.14 Special cases of gearbox interpolation • Distance-coded reference mark system for each gantry axis To avoid the need to traverse large distances for reference point approach purposes, it is possible to use a measuring system with distance-coded reference marks as the sole or as the second measuring system[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.18.15 Gearbox interpolation status data 12.18.15 Gearbox interpolation status data In the SINUMERIK 840C control system, the currently valid configuration and status data of the active and inactive GI groupings are stored in the so-called gearbox interpolation (GI) status data. A memory area is reserved for each [...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples 12.18.16 Examples 12.18.16.1 Overview of application examples • Hobbing • Inclined infeed axes 12.18.16.2 Hobbing Interrelated functions in hobbing process The following diagram shows the configuration of a typical hobbing machine. The machine comprises five numerically controlled axes and a co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.16 Examples The hobbing machine functions are interrelated as follows: C (FA) Y (LA 3) Z (LA 2) B (LA 1) The workpiece table axis (C) is the following axis; in this example, it is influenced by three leading drives. The following axis setpoint is calculated cyclically by means of the following logic equation: [...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples Example calculations of u dz and u dy . mm mm degrees degrees u dz = sin ° m n * · 360 u dy = cos ° m n * · 360 in which m n = Normal modulus (in mm) ° = Angle of incline of gear ° = Lead angle of hobber Configuring the GI grouping via the part program 1st leading axis = Cutter spindle B (set[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.18.16 Examples Two co-ordinate systems are defined: X / Z = Simulated cartesian co-ordinate system Axes X and Z have no measuring circuit assignment. They are therefore referred to as "simulated axes". The machine axes U/Z1 are programmed in the cartesian co-ordinate system. U / Z1 = Real, non-cartesian[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.18.16 Examples Relationship between the simulated leading axes and the following axes Result new Z1 value Programmed X value Programmed Z value 1 U= X · –––– cos Result new U value Z1= X ·(–tan ) +Z Real, non-cartesian coordinate system Simulated, cartesian coordinate system Example of parameterizatio[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.18.16 Examples Programming the GI groupings via the part program: GI grouping 1: 1st leading axis = X Following axis = U Setpoint position link without compensatory controller (for simulation axes, K3) Define configuration: G401 X K3 U L F Activate link: @631 R100 K20.5 L F G402 X I1 J=R100 U L F GI grouping 2: 1[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19 Interpolation and compensation with tables and temperature compensation 12.19 Interpolation and compensation with tables and temperature compensation Corresponding data: • IKA data 1 - 3 IKA configuration, IKA curves, IKA compensation points • NC MD 356* IKA warning limit • NC MD 1148* IKA / TC velocity [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.1 Options Implementation of any geometry or velocity profiles SW 4 and higher with IKA Stage 2 IKA Stage 2 makes it possible to define a fully optional geometry between an input variable and the associated output variable. For this purpose, the relevant values of the output quantity are allocated to a number o[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.2 Activation Activation of IKA Stage 2 The option IKA Stage 2 applies from SW 4 and contains the IKA option. With IKA Stage 2 it is possible not only to implement compensations but also any (non-linear) interpolations. The options for presetting the input and output quantity have been expanded in IKA Stage 2 f[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring Interlocks In the case of axis-specific interlocks of IKA / TC movements, the current IKA / TC value is "frozen", it remains applied in static form. In this case, a distinction is made between: • Direction-dependent interlocks – SW lim[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring SW limit switch + 0 P NC P SW P M P 1 Path distance to go IKA value • IKA / TC motion in positive direction • SW limit switch monitoring prior to traversal knows only P NC and does not therefore output an alarm • Alarm 148* is output during traversal when P SW is reached. b) W[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.3 Interlocks and monitoring IKA warning limit with axis compensation When the compensatory / additional values of the output quantity are high, the machine may make unexpected movements which are only partly limited by the monitoring functions. The present output value is therefore checked against the limit se[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION (TC) function is available as an option. With this compensation function, the compensation values applying to the current temperature are transferred from the PLC to the NC via the command channel. The requisite comp[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC The effects of both errors are cumulative and mutually superimposed so that the approximation with regards to actual value influence is as follows: -x +x Reference point Error (comp. value) Error curve Approximated error line ß P 0 K TC P x 0 K TCabs Please note the following def[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC 12.19.4.2 Functional description Temperature error compensation can be performed for every axis. The parameters for TC can only be transferred via the command channel of the PLC to the NC. The following parameters must be defined and transferred for every axis that is to be compen[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.4 Temperature compensation TC Data format of user DB • Length in words: Always value 7 in KF format • Axis number: Values 1 to 30 in KF format • Absolute TC value K TCabs : With sign, in units (MS), in KF format (value range ±1 073 741 823) • Coefficient tan ß: With sign, with significance 2 -31 in K[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables The INTERPOLATION AND COMPENSATION WITH TABLES (IKA and IKA stage 2) functions are available as options. This function can be used to establish dependencies between an input quantity and an associated output quantit[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables In the case of a cam contour, a rotary axis value of the C axis (input quantity) and the associated X axis value (output quantity) are required for each intermediate point. The output quantity is added to the programmed X axis position as an offset. Either linear or[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.1 Functional description Possibilities with • IKA – 32 IKA configurations – 32 IKA curves (SW 3) – 16 000 IKA points (from SW 3) 65 535 IKA points (from SW 4) – Scanning in IPO cycle – Control of axis and actual values – Changes to the input an[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.2 Data structures and data assignment The functions of IKA and IKA Stage 2 are parameterized by the user via the individual data types depending on the functions that he wants. The sum of the data types can be divided into three data areas. • %IKA1 Definit[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Data access via operator panel/machine data dialog The IKA data can be edited in machine data dialog input displays. These must be handled in the same way as the machine data (password protection). The data can be erased only in start-up mode. The IKA data input dis[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 2. Example for calculating compensation curves ( IKA example 1 ) Machining of a contour with IKA Y[mm]=100+160/3*COS[5/7*X[mm]]) from [X,Y]=[252,46.666] to [0,153.333] Caution: This example does not take the tool offset into account! 0. Preparation : N0001 @40c K11 [...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 3. IKA configuration [ika1 data] : N0150 @40c K1 K2 K1 - IKA 2 uses curve 1 N0155 @40c K40 K2 K1 - Activate extended IKA N0160 @40c K43 K2 K1 - Cubic interpolation on - Definition of input A : N0165 @40c K20 K2 K102 Type : Feedrate axis actual value N0170 @40c K2 K2[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 5. Deactivate and retract N0250 @40c K11 K2 K0 - Deactivate IKA 2 @714 G200 Y - Synchronization of actual value system N0255 G0 Y200 - Retract N0260 X300 N0270 @100 K300 Jump to end 6. Errors N0281 M00 (error 1) T55=1: only one pointer <> 0 ! @100 K300 N0282 M[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 3. G functions From IKA Stage 2, an IKA configuration can be programmed in a part program using the following G functions: • G410 Deactivate IKA link branch • G411 Define / delete IKA configuration • G412 Activate / deactivate IKA link branch If the IKA functi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Note: - y=No. of the IKA configuration; max. 2 places x=Values - The data set for an IKA configuration most not be larger than 255 characters. • Output of IKA curves %IKA2 Ny T5=x T6=x (up to SW 3) Ny T5=x T6=x T55=x (SW 4 and higher) : Note: y=No. of the curve; m[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.4 Activating IKA data %IKA1 The IKA data of %IKA1 are active immediately. %IKA2 und %IKA3 Changes to %IKA2 and %IKA3 must be activated separately. Once all the IKA data have been entered in %IKA2 and %IKA3 all the compensation curves are calculated with the [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.01 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.5 Overview of valid IKA data Definition of the individual data types: Data type Significance Data No. within data type Data type for @30c / 40c or T para. G fct. for IKA G fct. for CGI Only valid with IKA Stage 2 Input quantity value 1 to 65536 7 -- Output q[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Data type Significance Data No. within data type Data type for @30c / 40c or T para. G fct. for IKA G fct. for CGI Only valid with IKA Stage 2 Weighting input A (denominator) 1 to 32 19 - Function not available x Input B (number) 1 to 32 25 G411 Function not availab[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.6 IKA calculation sequence IKA calculation sequence Link type K11 / K12 Input switching module: LINK ON / OVER / OFF, pos. rel. Input evaluation module: T18 / T19, T15, T16 Interpolation switching module of IKA SW 4 Output evaluation via numerator / denomina[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables If the output is assigned to the compensation value of an axis (446), the output value is limited only by the compensation limitation module (9). The limitation values are then specified in the machine data. When the limitation values are reached, this is indicated [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.7 Meaning of the data types • %IKA1, IKA configuration Every data type can be read or written by defining the relevant type no. The control byte can be accessed byte by byte or bit by bit. In the part program. @30C / @40C are used to read and write the dat[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables The input quantity compensation is controlled via bit 3 of the IKA configuration. This type of compensation is only possible in SW 3! If the compensation value is too large, the compensated axis tends to oscillate. Extended IKA function Data type: 40 Format: 1 Bit B[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Number of the control curve Data type: 1 The required control curve can be selected for the IKA configuration with values 1 ... 32. Input A (number) Data type: 2 Depending on the input quantity A type, this is either a global axis number or the number of a global or[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables Weighting input A, numerator Data type: 18 Input format: ±99 999 999 Weighting input A, denominator Data type: 19 Input format: ±99 999 999 By entering the numerator and denominator, it is possible to stretch and compress a compensation curve. The offset of the mo[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.8 Links between IKA data areas Start pointer 5 End pointer 6 Activation byte 55 Start pointer 5 End pointer 6 Activation byte 55 Start pointer 5 End pointer 6 Activation byte 55 Input quantity value 7 Output quantity value 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 2. IKA Contro[...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 Interpolation and compensation with tables 12.19.5.9 Viewing the IKA data during programming The IKA data can be viewed during programming if the following conditions are fulfilled: The IKA editor consists of list module displays used for display only, i.e. the input fields are greyed out. • The IKA data a[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) The "Extended stop and retract" function is an option. Corresponding data NC MD 312 ... 317 Assignment of outputs of mixed I / O for retraction of a mode group NC MD 318 ... 323 Assignment of inp[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.1 Functional description 12.20.1 Functional description The term "Extended stop and retract" refers to the error reactions listed below: • Parameterization of error reaction by means of machine data and part program commands • Monitoring sources (error identification) • Shutdown of machine in o[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) – Application of internal sources: - Emergency retraction threshold FA / FS, - 611D DC link voltage threshold, drive MD 1634, - 611D generator speed threshold, drive MD 1635 which must initiate a retraction operation. – Definition of internal reactions to b[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20 Extended stop and retract (ESR) (SW 4 and higher) 3.) The possibility of initiating or reacting via mixed I/O / CSB and high-speed data channel: • Channel / mode group-specific – Inputs for external sources – Outputs for external reactions • Axis / spindle-specific – Outputs for external reactions 4.[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.20.4 Mains buffering and mains failure detection 611A / D 12.20.4 Mains failure detection and mains buffering 12.20.4.1 Mains failure detection Mains failures can be detected by means of the infeed / regenerative feedback (I / RF) module when the 611 A / D drive system is used. By using terminal 73 on the I / RF [...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.4 Mains buffering and mains failure detection 611A / D 12.20.4.4 DC link undervoltage monitoring in 611D With the 611D package 2, the user can parameterize a new threshold for DC link voltage monitoring (drive MD 1634). The DC link voltage monitoring function via drive MD 1604, which is already available with [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.19.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit 12.20.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit 12.20.5.1 DC link buffering An axis / spindle can buffer the DC link by means of generator-mode braking. This function can be selected through appropriate parameterizati[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.5 DC link buffering and monitoring of generator minimum speed limit setpoint zero), energy is fed back to the DC link. This drive measures the DC link voltage cyclically. If the voltage increases above the values set in drive MD 1631 and 1632, the two- position controller is deactivated, i.e. the instantaneous[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.19.6 Stopping 12.20.6.1 Stopping as open-loop control function The time characteristics of this reaction type are shown in the diagram. Parameterizable / programmable stop operation as open-loop control function n T1 (MD) 324 T2 (MD) 325 T3 1452* or 495* Mode group stop t FA / FS In the case of mode group stop er[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.6 Stopping Existing GI and IKA link branches with simulated leading axes / input quantities are not cancelled until T2 has expired. Continued traversal as an interpolative process is desirable to suppress the brief synchronism deviation (break in speed curve) which occurs on transition to braking mode. It is p[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.20.7 Retraction 12.20.7 Retraction The retraction motion can be parameterized and programmed. The following diagram shows the possible sources and the associated reactions for the extended, parameterizable and open-loop controlled retraction without giving the programmable retraction motions. Programmable retract[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.19.7 Retraction The following individual sources are also available: • Axis / spindle-specific sources: - Retraction threshold FA / FS exceeded - DC link voltage warning threshold - Generator minimum speed limit Activation of sources: The user determines which of the possible axis sources initiate a retraction [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.20.7 Retraction 12.20.7.1 Retraction as open-loop control function The reaction to detected retraction events can be parameterized: • Switching of outputs on mixed I / O module • Traversal of an internal retraction with the axes programmed for this purpose • Output of a mode group stop alarm • Output of P[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.7 Retraction • If the function ”Consider software limit switch with controlled emergency retraction” is selected, the SW limit switch function has the same effect on emergency retraction as in the NC channels. Depending on the setting in machine data 5003, bit 7 ”No deceleration at limit switch”, eit[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.20.7 Retraction 12.20.7.2 Retraction as autonomous drive function (611D) On SW 4 and higher, axes with digital 611D drive systems can perform a retraction autonomously if the control fails (sign of life detection) or if the DC link voltage drops below a warning threshold. The retraction motion is performed by the[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8.1 Special case voltage failure Requirements The generator operation and emergency retraction functions on SINUMERIK 840C require the following hardware and s[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction Example: C = 6000 µ F (see table 16 kW infeed / regenerative feedback module) - 20% U Zk = 550 Volt (P1634) U min = 350 Volt (assumed) E = 1 / 2 * 4800 µ F * ((550 V) 2 - (350 V) 2 ) = 432 Ws This energy is available at load for a time of:[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction Option for programmable emergency retraction The function is triggered via parameterizable sources. The response can be drive-autonomous or open-loop controlled. The possible responses are: • Stopping (time-controlled continuation and brak[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction Drive-autonomous stopping and retraction Drive-autonomous stopping and retraction initiated by the NC must be used if a response as a function of the control (i.e. interpolation) is no longer possible, for example, if a very fast response is[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.20.8 Configuration help for generator operation and emergency retraction 12.20.8.2 Activating autonomous drive emergency retraction in case of PLC failure or 5 V undervoltage (as from SW 6.3) No NCK failure, activation only when in operative mode, no run up in the general reset mode Activating Clearing for activa[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.21 Simultaneous axes 12.21 Simultaneous axes 12.21.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 5004 bit 0,1 1st or 2nd handwheel connected • SD 564* Handwheel pulse evaluation • DB32 DWk+1 bit 0,1 1st or 2nd handwheel active for the relevant axis General Simultaneous axes are axes which can be traversed at a separately pr[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.21.2 Handwheel for simultaneous axes in automatic mode Please refer to the NC Programming Guide for the SINUMERIK 840C for information regarding programming of the HANDWHEEL OVERLAY OF SIMULTANEOUS AXES IN AUTOMATIC MODE function. Starting up the function An option bit is not required for the function. It is mere[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.22 Software cam (position measuring signals) 12.22 Software cam (position measuring signals) The SOFTWARE CAM (position measuring signals) function is an option and can only be used on linear axes. 12.22.1 Corresponding data NC MD 310 Assignment cam output byte to synchr. user INTERF (in preparation) NC MD 311 As[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.2 Functional description Negative cam < positive cam 2nd NC axis 1st NC axis Machine zero 1 N positive 0 1 N negative 0 Cam range negative Cam range positive Cam position (positive cam) Cam position (negative cam) Positive cam < negative cam 2nd NC axis 1st NC axis Machine zero 1 N positive 0 1 N negativ[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.22.2 Functional description Cam values All cam values are contained in the setting data 7000 to 7007. This range is referred to as the cam value block and includes the positions of eight cams which are divided into four cam pairs. Position negative cam 1 Position positive cam 1 Position negative cam 2 Position po[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.2 Functional description Assignment between cam pairs and axes The cam pairs are assigned via the NC/PLC interface to specific axes as follows: Bit No. 11 10 9 8 . . . 1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 30th axis DB32 DW123 127 131 239 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 0 0 0 0 "Cam pairs" function inactive 0 0 0 1 Cam pai[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.22.2 Functional description ACTIVATE CAM / AXIS ASSIGNMENT DB48 DR0.6 CAM / AXIS ASSIGNMENT ACTIVATED = DB48 DR1.6 A A S A -> as a function of PLC program S -> as a function of system S 1 0 1 0 Notes: • A cam pair can be only ever be assigned to one NC axis at a time. • Several pairs of cams can be acti[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.22.2 Functional description 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. Byte no. Axis1 DL 121 Cam 4+ Cam 4– Cam 3+ Cam 3– Cam 2+ Cam 2– Cam 1+ Cam 1– Axis1 DR 121 Axis2 DL 125 Cam 4+ Cam 4– Cam 3+ Cam 3– Cam 2+ Cam 2– Cam 1+ Cam 1– Axis2 DR 125 : : Axis30 DL 237 Cam 4+ Cam 4– Cam 3+ Cam 3– Cam 2+ Cam 2– Cam 1+ [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.23 Actual-value system for workpiece 12.23 Actual-value system for workpiece 12.23.1 Corresponding data • SD 5001 bit 0 (Actual-value system for workpiece) • NC MD 5153 bit1 (Reset position 6th G group) • NC MD 140* (Basic setting 6th G group) • NC MD 142* (Basic setting of tool offset block) • NC MD 54[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.23.2 Reference systems Diagram showing reference systems -150 900 M - Machine reference point (coordinates: X M and Y M ) W1 - Workpiece reference point (coordinates: X W1 and Y W1 ) W2 - Workpiece reference point (coordinates: X W2 and Y W2 ) Y M 400 X M X W1 W1 X W2 100 G54 250 P XW1 (250) 500 P YW2 (-300) Y W2[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.23.3 Functional description • At the end of a program (or after reset), the last active ZO group (G54 - G57) and TO (D0 - D819) are retained. The actual-value display is merely adjusted by the programmable offsets (G58 and G59). • When the function is deactivated (SD 5001, bit 0 = 0), all actual values displa[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24 Travel to fixed stop 12.24 Travel to fixed stop The "Travel to fixed stop" function is available as an option. 12.24.1 Corresponding data • NC MD 1804* bit 3 Clamping tolerance monitoring active bit 4 Sensor signal PLC for travel to fixed stop bit 5 Axis can travel to fixed stop • NC MD 1284* Cla[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.2 Functional description The operating principle is explained below on the basis of an example (showing sleeve being pressed onto workpiece). "Start travel to fixed stop" position Progr. end position Start position Actual position after "Travel to fixed stop" Selection The axis traverses at[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.2 Functional description Deselection The NC detects that the function has been deselected through the programming of G220. In this case, the interface signals "Travel to fixed stop active" and "Fixed stop reached" are reset. The axis switches to position control. If a traversing motion is p[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) 12.24.4.1 SIMODRIVE 611A In this system, a fixed current limitation is specified via a resistor circuit (or via R12) in the drive actuator. This current limit is then addressed by the control via a PLC output (which acts on t[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) The NC setpoint interface then outputs a voltage value according to the setting in NC MD 1144* Switchover current setpoint; however, the current limitation in the actuator becomes operative as a result of the activation of te[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.4 Travel to fixed stop with fixed clamping torque (torque limitation via terminal 96) Functional sequence The control must switch the spindle to C-axis operation before the function is selected. It does this by activating terminal E1 (C-axis operation) of the drive actuator. The NC detects selection of functio[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque Hardware connections: Actua- tor 20 22 56 96 14 Speed controller Current setpoint limitation Current controller Sensor (optional) I act NC PLC Position actual value Speed setpoint M T P Change- over sp./curr. 24 Functional sequence The NC detects selecti[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque 12.24.5.2 SIMODRIVE 611A MSD or SIMODRIVE 660 With these systems, the drive is switched over from torque-limited operation to torque- controlled operation after the fixed stop is reached. In this way, a torque of any desired value (0.1 to 99.9% of max. t[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.5 Travel to fixed stop with programmable clamping torque The NC setpoint interface then begins to output the current setpoint defined in NC MD 1144*. The NC outputs the interface signal FIXED STOP REACHED to the PLC. The PLC then activates terminal E5 of the actuator, thus effecting a switchover from speed- co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection/deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.1 Selection of travel to fixed stop (fixed stop is reached) ANALOG Travel to fixed stop selection (Fixed stop is reached) Curr. setpoint = clamping torque Progr. acc. to ter[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.2 Selection of travel to fixed stop (fixed stop is not reached) Timing of travel to fixed stop selection Target position G221 select block 1 NFAFAKT VIL --> PLC PLCOUT 96 QFAFAKT FANSCHLAG NFFESTANER Speed setpoint PLCOUT_22 QFFESTANER D[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.3 Deselection of travel to fixed stop Timing of travel to fixed stop deselection Path in deselection block optional G220 1 VRED_FFA VIL --> Servo Current setpoint VIL --> Servo Current setpoint DAC NFAFAKT NFFESTANER Speed-controlled [...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.4 Meaning of signals 1. G220 Deselection block for travel to fixed stop 1. G221 Selection block for travel to fixed stop 2. NFAFAKT Interface signal "Travel to fixed stop" active 3. PLCOUT 96 PLC output which is connected to term.[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 12.93 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop 12.24.7.5 Travel to fixed stop with digital drives (SIMODRIVE 611D MSD/FDD) The functional sequence for digital drives is basically the same as that for analog drives. However, digital drives do not have external terminal wiring or any resistor cir[...]

12.93 12 Functional Descriptions 12.24.7 Diagrams for selection / deselection of travel to fixed stop Diagram of 611D G221 Travel to fixed stop active Fixed stop reached Block change Motor current Following error 0 0 MD 1280* P value SD 320 MD 1144* © Siemens AG 1992 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197- AA50 12–257 SINUMERIK 840C (IA)[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.25 Flexible memory configuration (SW 4 and higher) 12.25 Flexible memory configuration (SW 4 and higher) 12.25.1 Corresponding data Machine data • NC MD 60000 Size of UMS memory • NC MD 60001 Size of part program memory • NC MD 60002 Number of IKA points • NC MD 60003 Memory for drive software for MSD •[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.1 Corresponding data With the new functionality of the flexible memory configuration, the user is now in a position to configure the memory such that it is ideally suited to the field of application of his machine tool; this functionality is available for every HW variant of the NC-CPU. The following character[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.25.3 Functional description 12.25.3 Functional description Assignment of data to memory areas The data are stored partly in the static RAM and partly in the dynamic RAM. Now that the " Flexible memory configuration " function has been introduced, the assignment of data to SRAM/DRAM memory space is as fo[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up DRAM: 704 KB for part program memory 64 KB for IKA data (corresponds to 4000 IKA points) 256 KB for UMS approx. 40 KB for block buffers for one channel (corresponds to 23 block buffers per channel) 0 KB for buffering of measured values (new " Extended measurement[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up The user can now configure the NC memory according to his requirements by following the procedure described below: Select softkey " File functions " to call display 1: Fig. 1 Machine Parameter Program. Services Diagnosis 04:45 Start-up / Machine data / Stand[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up Fig. 2 Start-up / Machine data / NC MD / Memory configuration DRAM memory configuration General configuration 60000 Size of UMS memory 256 KB 60001 Size of part program memory 704 KB 60002 Number of IKA points 200 at 16 B 60003 Load MSD drive software yes 0 KB 60004 L[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up Fig. 3 Machine Parameter Program. Services Diagnosis Start-up / machine data / NC MD / memory configuration DRAM data SRAM data Reconfig. memory File functions DRAM memory configuration Number of meas. value buffers 62000 Axis 1 0 at 4 B 62001 Axis 2 0 at 4 B 62002 Ax[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up The set configuration is activated through selection of softkey " Reconfig. memory ". The activation command is rejected if • the NC is not in general reset mode. In this case, the dialog box " Only possible in reset " appears which is acknowledg[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up • If a module with 486 CPU is installed and digital drives are connected, the MD mentioned above must be set to "1". Loading the drive software as from SW 6 General notes: Up to SW 5 the drive software (MSD and FDD) is loaded from the MMC hard disk into th[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up Loading the UMS Now that the " Flexible memory configuration " function has been introduced, the user can prevent loading of the UMS by setting NC-MD 60000 in file NCMEMCFG to zero. With previous SW versions, the UMS analysis is initiated after UMS loading; [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.25.4 Memory configuration on control power-up However, the block buffer number may be set to zero only for those channels which will never be activated for the machine tool in question. It is not possible for the NC-SW to perform a check during power-up of the number of defined channels or of the number of block [...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) • For switched-off channels, the interactive message "No memory available for function" is output for the number of "Extended overstore". Selection from PLC is rejected with the error number 144 . 12.26 BERO interface (SW 4 and higher) BERO encoders can no[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.27 Parameter set switchover 12.27 Parameter set switchover The Parameter set switchover function is as option (SW 4 and higher). The parameter set switchover function allows parameters of various NC control areas (position control, actual value detection) or of the drive to be switched over simultaneously and wit[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.1 Parameter set switchover (up to SW 3) Spindle parameter sets (NCK/SERVO) 8 parameter sets have been provided to date for spindles. A mechanical gear stage is generally linked to these parameter sets, but is not a mandatory requirement. Gear-stage-depend. parameters Effective in: SERVO / NCK 1stPaSe 2ndPaSe 3[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.27.1 Parameter set switchover (up to SW 3) a) Spindle gear stage selection through user M function to PLC (M43 in example) b) Gear stage selection through programming of S value (semi-automatic) Part program Drive parameter set 611D MSD SERVO Spindle DB 31, DR K+74, bit 0-2 DB 31, DR K+72, bit 0-2 PLC Actual gear[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) The parameters to be switched over are divided into 3 parameter groups (PaGr) in the control. The individual parameter groups are switched over independently of one another. Each parameter gr[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) "Position control" parameter group The structure of the "Position control" parameter group is identical for axes and spindles. This parameter group contains the parameters "Servo gain (Kv) factor", "Feedforward control [...]

09.01 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) "Position controller" group Spindle 1stPaSe 2ndPaSe 3rdPaSe 4thPaSe 5thPaSe 6thPaSe 7thPaSe 8thPaSe Parameter Servo gain (Kv) factor 435* 436* 437* 438* 439* 440* 441* 442* Speed feedfor. contr. factor 465* 2442* 2443* 2444* 2445* 2446* 2447* 2[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) " Ratio" parameter group The "Ratio (R)" parameter group contains the following parameters: Axis 1stPaSe 2ndPaSe 3rdPaSe 4thPaSe 5thPaSe 6thPaSe 7thPaSe 8thPaSe Parameter Number of teeth, motor 3032* 3036* 3040* 3044* 3048* 3052* 3056[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.2 Parameter set switchover with SW 4 and higher (option) • The function is disabled for measuring systems with distance-coded zero marks, i.e. a gear ratio other than 1:1 must not be set for such axes. Incorrect MD settings generate the alarm "Parameterization error NC-MD" and service alarm 312. ?[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.27.3 Switchover In addition to variable increment evaluation, a gear ratio can be activated additionally via parameters "Number of teeth, motor" and "Number of teeth, spindle". This is necessary when gear ratios change as a result of gear changes (with indirect actual value sensing). Gear rati[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.27.4 Diagnosis 12.27.4 Diagnosis The currently effective parameter sets in the various parameter groups are displayed in the NC service display for axes / spindles in the individual displays. Structure of service displays: Service Axes Individual display Axis: 1 Following error Absolute actual value Absolute setp[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.27.5 Operator inputs 12.27.5 Operator inputs The operator inputs the machine data for the parameter sets under DIAGNOSIS / START- UP / MACHINE DATA / NCK-MACHINE DATA / AXIS or SPINDLE where the new MD are arranged under the existing parameter set data. 12.27.6 Power ON, system start, power OFF, restart During co[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28 High-speed data channels 12.28 High-speed data channels The "High-speed data channels" function is an option (SW 4 and higher). 12.28.1 Corresponding data • Option 6FC5 150-0AS40-0AA0 • Data block DB2 (configuring DB) • Data block DB 3 (data transmission areas) 12.28.2 Functional description Wi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.28.2 Functional description • It is possible to define in the PLC user program which data are to be transferred via a maximum of 32 high-speed data channels. • The minimum updating rate of these high-speed channels is identical to the set interpolation cycle (in NC), but can be set to a high multiple of the i[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.3 Configuration 12.28.3 Configuration In order to avoid complicated programming involving pointers and lengthy run times in the PLC user program, the configuring channel and data transfer areas are stored in different data blocks: A "Configuring DB" with 32 DW (DB2) and "High-speed data channels[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks . . . . . . . . . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. Byte No. DL 0 with acknowldg. Read / write STROBE DR 0 DL 1 DR 1 DL 2 DR 2 DL 3 DR 3 DL 4 DR 4 DL 5 DR 5 DL 6 DR 6 DL 7 DR 7 DB 2 configuring DB O p e r a t i n g m o d e 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 E,[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks DL 0 bit 8 "Strobe": Strobe for activation of configuring channel. Set by PLC user and reset by NCK after acceptance (or rejection with error code) of configuration. DL 0 bit 14 "Read / write": Definition of transmission direction: 0 = PLC reads, 1 = PLC wr[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks DB 3 data transfer areas . . . . . . . . . 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No. Byte No. DL 0 Data channel 8 Data channel 7 Data channel 6 Data channel 5 Data channel 4 Data channel 3 Data channel 2 Data channel 1 DR 0 Data channel 16 Data channel 15 Data channel 14 Data channel 13 Data ch[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.4 Format of interface data blocks Activation bits (PLC NC): Each of the 32 bits represents a data transfer area, bit 0 = data transfer area 1. Data transfer areas which have already been configured can be activated (bit x = 1) or deactivated (bit x = 0) with this signal. The activation signals are evaluated in[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.28.5 Configuration of a high-speed data channel 12.28.5 Configuration of a high-speed data channel Step 1: Reset activation signal in DB 3. Step 2: Divide up DB 3 appropriately for all data transfer areas used. Program pointers for the data transfer areas accordingly. Step 3: Enter job number in configuring chann[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.7 Use of a high-speed data channel 12.28.7 Use of a high-speed data channel Case 1: Write with acknowledgement, configure high-speed data channel, cyclical from now on: If "New value for NC data write" is not set, enter value to be written, set "New value for NC data write". Case 2: Write w[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Permissible function identifiers and associated configuring parameters: Function identifier Explanation Max. permissible number Parameter[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Signal number Meaning Data format Unit Attribute 11009 Capacity utilization U (Unsigned 16 Bit) 7FFFH=100% Read 11010 Torque setpoint S (Signed 16 Bit) 4000H=100% Drive MD 1725 Read 11011 Active power S (Signed 16 Bit) 0.01 KW [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Signal number Meaning Data format 1) Unit Attribute 5 Part setpoint SL 0.01 % of max. load speed 3) Read 6 Synchronism deviation SL UMS Read 7 Angular offset (mech. coupling) SL UMS Read 8 Absolute position actual value (withou[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) The data to be read are selected via configuring parameter 2. The following table shows the available data options: Configuring parameter 2 Addressed data 10 Outputs of mixed I / O modules in NCK (4 bytes) 111 Inputs of first m[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Explanation of NCK data (SW 5 and higher) Function identifier Explanation Max. permissible number Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 03 (SW 5 and higher) NCK data 32 0 Signal number Axis number Channel / IKA number[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Example: Parameterization of DB 2 for reading without acknowledgement of the signal path feedrate (signal No. = 2) in the 3rd channel is as follows: Byte no. Content Meaning DL 0 0x01 Operation without acknowledgement / reading[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 04.96 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) Axial feed: Formula for servo trace: RW=MW*120000*LF / IT [mm / min] Formula for high-speed data channel: RW=MW*60000*LF / IT [mm / min] Example: G91 G94 F1000 Z10 X10 In servo trace: Read-off MW = 1885 in Z axis with LF = 0.5*[...]

04.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.28.8 Overview of function identifiers and configuring parameters (DB 2, DR 2 ... DR 6) IKA output quantity value: Important: The IKA No. selected in the servo trace screen must be larger by 1 than the desired IKA No (applies for SW 5.1 and 5.2). If the output quantity is a position, the following applies: Formula[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.29 Extension of inprocess measurement (SW 4 and higher) 12.29 Extension of inprocess measurement (SW 4 and higher) The "Extended inprocess measurement" function is an option. Extended measurement (as from SW 6) General The new ”extended in-process measurement” function allows for the simultaneous pr[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.1 Functional description Measuring block parameter: MT = Measuring sensor input Depending on the hardware, inputs 1 or 2 can be measuring sensor inputs. Sensor input one 1 is effective on all measuring circuit hardware (detailed description in section 12.29.2, Hardware - secondary conditions for measuring). Ex[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.29.1 Functional description MA=No. of measured values The number of measured values indicates the number of measurements to be recorded for a complete measuring sequence. The required number of R parameters per measuring axis is derived from the number of measured values: Required R parameters per measuring axis [...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" "Extended measurement" G720/1 can be programmed for every measuring circuit variant: • Standard measuring circuit with SPC 6FC5 111 0BA0.-0AA0, • Standard me[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 10.94 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for "Extended measurement" SIMODRIVE 611D: • 611D measuring circuits can evaluate both measuring probes alternatively; they can also react to the following signal edge sequences: "rising / rising", "falling / falling" or "alternately rising / f[...]

10.94 12 Functional Descriptions 12.29.2 General hardware conditions for ”Extended measurement” No check is made to ascertain whether R parameters which are also required by other functions are being overwritten. Which R parameters within the available parameter range are used is left to the discretion of the user. If the programmed G720 / G721[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.30 Master / slave for drives, SW 4.4 and higher, option 12.30 Master/slave for drives, SW 4.4 and higher, option The function master / slave for drives consists of the options: • Master / slave basic package (speed setpoint coupling without torque compensation) • Master / slave torque compensation control (ma[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.2 Difference to synchronous spindle / GI 12.30.2 Difference to synchronous spindle/GI Unlike the synchronous spindle or GI, master / slave operation is no substitute for a mechanical link but can only support torque distribution where a mechanical coupling exists. Master / slave operation is not advisable wher[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.30.3 Function description The output can now be injected either only to the slave or only to the master of the torque compensation control (see switch in the diagram). Structure of master / slave with torque compensation control MD 1812*, bit 7 or MD 523* bit 7 X set K v N set N act Kp, Ki Tersi TM1 Tx Kp, Ki Ter[...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.3 Function description Parameterization with the NC machine data The slave is parameterized via the NC machine data. This is only a short list with a few notes relevant to the function: Basic package MD axis / MD spindle MD 1336* / 2700* MD 1812*, bit 4 / *523* bit 4: MD 1812*, bit 7 / *523* bit 7: Additional [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.30.4 Activating / deactivating the master / slave torque compensation control 12.30.4 Activating/deactivating the master/slave torque compensation control Master / slave operation is activated and deactivated via the PLC signals in the DB32 or DB31 of the slave in question. In this way, it is possible to achieve [...]

09.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.4 Activating / deactivating the master / slave torque compensation control For the master, function generator operation is also permitted in the SERVO and in the SIMODRIVE 611D (start-up functions). Measurement of the position control loop (SERVO) is made with the speed and torque coupling active. With measure[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.95 12.30.5 Response in the event of an error So that all axes of a master / slave grouping exit the follow-up control at the same time, they must be reset internally at the same moment. For this reason, all axes of a master / slave grouping must be defined in the same mode group. Incorrect parameterization of the maste[...]

03.95 12 Functional Descriptions 12.30.6 Effects on existing functions 12.30.6 Effects on existing functions Master / slave operation does not cause any function restrictions in the master except for the alarm handling described in the previous section. For the slave , the following changes must be taken into account because speed / torque coupling[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.31 Dynamic SW limit switches for following axes 12.31 Dynamic SW limit switches for following axes 12.31.1 Corresponding data • MD 560*, bit 1 Dyn. SW limit switches for following axes • MD 560*, bit 5 Software limit switches active • MD 3932* Deadtime compensation for dyn. SW limit switches • MD 3936* Mi[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.31.2 Description of function The reduction range represents a safety area. As soon as the following axis is positioned in the reduction range, the path speed of the channels is reduced. Since the speed set for the following axis in the next IPO cycle is not known, the path speed of the channels must be restricted[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.31.2 Description of function It is possible to define for each individual channel whether or not its path speed must be reduced by means of the PLC signal to channel "Do not reduce channel". If a following axis is positioned within the reduction range, then the appropriate interface signal: "Axis i[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6) 12.32 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6) 12.32.1 General description The ”Collision monitoring” function prevents collision of moving and stationary parts of the machine. A protection zone (abbreviation SR) can be defined for a machine part requiring protection. The dis[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.2 Defining a protection zone It is also possible to define protection zones in two dimensions. Two-dimensional protection zones that must be monitored mutually, must be defined in the same plane. In the event of an error, alarm 111 ”Error in collision monitoring data” is output with the code 96=protection [...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.4 The motion axes of a protection zone 12.32.4 The motion axes of a protection zone If a protection zone is to be able to follow a moving machine part, e.g. a tool slide, the real machine axes that move the machine part must assigned to the protection zone. These axes are the motion axes of the protection zone[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.5 Machine coordinate systems Offset vector 4th machine coordinate system X coordinate: MD 343 Y coordinate: MD 344 Z coordinate: MD 345 Mirroring vector 4th machine coordinate system (X, Y, Z): gen. MD 5028, 0-2 12.32.6 Adaptation of the protection zone to the active tool The size of protection zone can automa[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.6 Adaptation of the protection zone to the active tool The axes in which the tool offset in the NC channel is calculated and that of the protection zone coordinate that is to be adapted to it are assigned to one another in the axis-specific machine data MD 3938*. Gen. machine data TO allowance: MD 300 Axis -sp[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.8 Reduction zone of a protection zone 12.32.8 Reduction zone of a protection zone Each coordinate of a protection zone that is assigned a motion axis has a reduction zone in this coordinate. The reduction zone is the distance around the protection zone within which it is only possible to traverse with a speed [...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.8 Reduction zone of a protection zone Calculation of the number of acceleration steps to brake from V max to 0 using a max : m= ; Integer component of the division v max a max m remainder = ; Remainder of the division v max a max Calculation of the max. braking distance · a max +m remainder · a max · m S br[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.10 Dead-time compensation 12.32.10 Dead-time compensation Because of the internal structure of the software, dead-time compensation must be performed for all motion axes functioning as ELG following axes. The dead time to be compensated is specified in the axis-specific machine data. Dead times: ELG following [...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.12 Collision alarms 12.32.12 Collision alarms When two protection zones collide, the axis-specific alarm ”Protection zone collision plus / minus” is output for all the motion axes of the protection zones specifying the direction. After that, traversal of the motion axes in the direction of the collision is[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine On the example of a double-slide turning machine, let us look at the configuration of collision monitoring with a total of five protection zones. The input resolution is: 10 -3 mm The safety distance of a protection[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine • Protection zone 1: Spindle chuck Protection zone data VALUES Motion axes X coordinate: MD 38000 = 0 Y coordinate: MD 38040 = 0 Z coordinate: MD 38080 = 0 FP1 vector X coordinate: MD 38120 = -162 Y coordinate: MD 38160 = 0 Z coordinate: MD 38200 = -2 Dimension ve[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine Protection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist.: MD 38761.0 = 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 - 8: MD 38801.0-7 = 00000100 SR 9 - 16: MD 38841.0-7 = 00000000 SR 17 - 20: MD 38881.0-7 = 00000000 SR 21 - 32: MD 38921.0-7 = 00000000 Protection zone 3: Turret[...]

07.97 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine Protection zone 4: Slide 2 Protection zone data VALUES Motion axes X coordinate: MD 38003 = X2 Y coordinate: MD 38043 = 0 Z coordinate: MD 38083 = Z2 FP1 vector X coordinate: MD 38123 = 113 Y coordinate: MD 38163 = 0 Z coordinate: MD 38203 = 28 Dimension vector X co[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 07.97 12.32.14 Example on a double-slide turning machine Protection zone data BITS Protection zone exists SR exist.: MD 38764.0 = 1 Monitoring reference OFF SR 1 - 8: MD 38804.0-7 = 00001000 SR 9 - 16: MD 38844.0-7 = 00000000 SR 17 - 20: MD 38884.0-7 = 00000000 SR 21 - 32: MD 38924.0-7 = 00000000 Machine coordinate system[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) 12.32.15.1 Additive protection zone adjustment via setting data The additive protection zone adjustment is activated by the MD 3876* bit 1 specific to protection zones. In order to be able to adjust a protection zone to dyn[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.32.15 Collision monitoring (as from SW 6.3) 12.32.15.3 Automatic protection zone adjustment for tool types > = 20 (as from SW 6.3) The automatic protection zone adjustment function for the active tool is extended to tool types > = 20. The automatic protection zone adjustment is activated not only up to the [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33 Description of function of current and speed setpoint filters 12.33 Description of function of current and speed setpoint filters 12.33.1 Introduction Owing to the complexity of setpoint filter applications, it is not possible to describe their scope of application in general terms at this point. The following[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.1 Introduction Function generator for FFT analysis (speed controller) Filter 1 Filter 2 611D: Speed feedforward control setpoint Speed setpoint filter Speed setpoint limitation Speed controller P gain 611D: Weight compensation/ feedforward control torque Torque setpoint limitation Torque setpoint limitation Sp[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.1 Introduction Function generator for FFT analysis PT2/bandstop MD 1500 . . . MD 1521 MD 1504 Setup mode : MD 1420 Speed setpoint filter 611D 2nd speed setpoint filter with low-pass and bandstop 611D: Speed setpoint feedforward control Speed setpoint limitation Speed controller P gain Torque setpoint monitorin[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.1 Introduction Current setpoint limitation Function generator for FFT analysis (current controller) MSD field control FDD field setpoint =0 Ust – d Ust – q T S R I d I q n – set ENC M U dq U RST n – act iq – set Filter 1 PT2: MD 1202 MD 1203 Bandstop: MD 1211 MD 1212 MD 1213 MD 1104 MD 1105 MD 1103 M[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.1 Introduction 12.33.1.1 Fourier analysis The integrated Fourier analysis function provides you with a particularly effective tool for optimizing the speed controller. It allows you to assess the speed control settings and the mechanical properties of the machine. To reach the Fourier analysis (frequency respo[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.1 Introduction 12.33.1.3 Measurement procedure In order to optimize a cascaded closed-loop control structure (current, speed, position control loops), it is necessary to start with the innermost (lowest level) control loop, i.e. the current control loop. This is set optimally by means of operator command "[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.2 Optimization of speed controller 12.33.2.1 Machine data MD 1001: Speed controller clock cycle MD 1004: Configuration control structure MD 1406: Speed controller type MD 1407: P gain speed controller MD 1408: P gain upper adaptation speed MD 1409: Reset time speed controller MD 1410: Reset time upper adaptati[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Current setpoint filters (low-pass or bandstop) are used to adapt the speed controller to the machinery to be controlled. The amplitude of the speed controller frequency response should remain at 0 dB over the entire fundamental frequency range. Note Th[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 12.33.3.1 Machine data MD 1200: Number of current setpoint filters MD 1201: Type of current setpoint filter MD 1202: Natural frequency current setpoint filter 1 MD 1203: Damping current setpoint filter 1 MD 1204: Natural frequency current setpoint filter 2 MD 1205: Damping current set[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Possible filter combinations Filter 4 Filter 3 Filter 2 Filter 1 MD 1201 PT2 PT2 PT2 PT2 = 0 0000 PT2 PT2 PT2 BS = 1 0001 PT2 PT2 BS PT2 0010 PT2 PT2 BS BS 0011 PT2 BS PT2 PT2 0100 PT2 BS PT2 BS 0101 PT2 BS BS PT2 0110 PT2 BS BS BS 0111 BS PT2 PT2 PT2 1000 BS PT2 PT2 BS 1001 BS PT2 BS[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Filter in the case of resonance at and above the controller stability limit Low-pass – With resonance bundle – Distribution of resonance phenomena (dependent on traversing direction, speed) Low-pass as current setpoint filter A low-pass filter is the better solution in cases where[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter 12.33.3.3 Scope of application of bandstops as current setpoint filter Bandstop filters must be dimensioned such that resonance is kept reliably low while the filter effect on the fundamental frequency range is minimized. Filter in the case of resonance in the fundamental frequency ra[...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Examples of frequency responses Amplitude response Magnitude [dB] log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 10 3 0 -3 -10 -20 -30 Phase response Phase angle log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 180 90 0 -90 -180 100 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 100 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz Fig. 12-5 Frequency response of undamped bandstop with blocking fr[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Amplitude response Magnitude [dB] log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 10 3 0 -3 -10 -20 -30 Phase angle log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 180 90 0 -90 -180 2000 Hz 2000 Hz 1000 Hz 500 Hz 1000 Hz 500 Hz Fig. 12-6 Frequency response of undamped bandstop with a bandwidth of 500 Hz and blocking frequency variations [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Amplitude response Magnitude [dB] log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 10 3 0 -3 -10 -20 -30 Phase response Phase angle log f [Hz] 10 2 10 3 180 90 0 -90 -180 150 250 0 0 150 250 Fig. 12-7 Bandstop performance with bandwidth of 500 Hz, blocking frequency of 1000 Hz and variation in counter bandwidth [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.3 Current setpoint filter Example of bandstop filter application The example below explains the basic procedure for applying one or several current setpoint filters. Peaks have been measured at 900 Hz and 1200 Hz. Bandstop filters must be used to dampen both resonant frequencies. The speed controller can then [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.4 Speed-dependent current setpoint filter 12.33.4 Speed-dependent current setpoint filter A speed-dependent current setpoint filter (torque setpoint smoothing) allows the user to reduce the speed ripple at higher speeds (MSD + FDD). 12.33.4.1 Machine data MD 1245: Threshold speed-dependent torque setpoint smoo[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter Speed setpoint filters are used to dampen mechanical resonant frequencies in the position control loop. Bandstops and low passes (PT2/PT1) can both be used as speed setpoint filters. The tasks of the filter are as follows: • Adapt the position controller [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter Speed setpoint filter combinations Filter 2 Filter 1 MD 1501 PT1 PT1 300 PT1 PT2 200 PT1 BS 201 PT2 PT1 100 PT2 PT2 000 PT2 BS 001 BS PT1 102 BS PT2 002 BS BS 003 12.33.5.2 Bandstops and low passes as speed setpoint filter Bandstop Depending on requirements, the "Bandstop" fun[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 08.96 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter 1 k vmax = 2(T ers,n + T n,w,gl + T tot,LR + T abt,LR ) T ers,n = Equivalent time of closed speed control loop T n,w,gl = Equivalent time of speed setpoint filter T tot,LR = Deadtime position/speed control loop (1 x T LR ) T abt,LR = Sampling of position actual value (0.5 x T LR ) LR = [...]

08.96 12 Functional Descriptions 12.33.5 Speed setpoint filter Example of speed setpoint bandstop fz : Blocking frequency MD 1514 / MD 1517 DZ : Damping numerator fbz = 2 x Dz x fz : Bandwidth numerator MD 1515 / MD 1518 Dn : Damping denominator fbn = 2 x Dz x fn : Bandwidth denominator MD 1516 / MD 1519 fn = MD 1520(%) x fz : Bandstop natural freq[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.34 Actual value passive monitoring axis (as from SW 6.3) 12.34 Actual value passive monitoring axis (as from SW 6.3) 12.34.1 General Special technological demands require the actual value of a measuring circuit at the same time in several axes. This entails that a measuring circuit is read out for the second time[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.34.5 Parameterization examples 12.34.5 Parameterization examples Example 1, incremental encoder: The 2nd measuring system of the 4th and the 1st measuring system of the 3rd axis monitor the measuring circuit of the 1st measuring system of the 1st axis. 1st axis: Principal axis (monitored axis) MD 18320.3=0 1st me[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) General When the 840 C control is not purposely, i.e. properly ramped down but instead just turned off, general problems can occur in the operating system. E.g. op[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) Interfaces The PLC user program has available the UPS signals in FY 22 bit 6 and bit 7. The signal ”Power failure” (FY 22 bit 6=1) in the PLC user program can cause an ”Express shutdown” on the MMC. After implementing ”Express shu[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) Example ”Express shutdown” Notes 1. A detailed description of the I codes as well as the FX73/74 is contained in the Win-OEM document. Only the I code 042F (Express shutdown) is currently implemented for the FlexOS control. The use of t[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) Structure of target data block (MMC feedback) DW x Package length Format: KF "4" DW x+1 Task sender Format: KH "0319H" DW x+2 Task receiver Format: KH "0201H" DW x+3 Task data structure Format: KH "1"[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.35 Uninterruptible power supply (UPS) (as from SW 6.3) (Express shutdown) Example: PLC program for the initiation of an ”Express shutdown” A DB255 User DB L KF 10 Package length T DW 10 L KH 0201 Sender (PLC) T DW 11 L KH 0319 Receiver (MBX) T DW 12 L KH 001 Task data structure T DW 13 L KH 5F02 Task number T[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36 Inch / metric switchover function (as from SW 6.3) 12.36 Inch/metric switchover function (as from SW 6.3) 12.36.1 General Use the softkey function to switch the measuring system from inch to metric and vice versa. The function ”Inch / metric switchover” has two features: 1: Inch / metric switchover functio[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.36.4 Inch / metric switchover function 12.36.4 Inch/metric switchover function Regarding NCK under section Parameter, Setting data there is a softkey reading ”Inch / metric switchover” which, when pressed, sends an I code to the MMC application Services which then fades in the following sub-dialog window (as [...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.5 Inch / metric conversion function 12.36.5 Inch/metric conversion function When the data required for loading the switchover do not yet exist, the user must change to the MMC application MDD to initiate the conversion process. The initiation of the conversion process is described below. Select the display usi[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.36.5 Inch / metric conversion function When the softkey ”Conversion start” is pressed another sub-dialog appears denoting the conversion direction. Fig.: Sub-dialog in the MDD Sequence for the softkey function ”Conversion start” on ”OK” in detail: 1. Copying the data from the source machine data block[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.6 Deleting the conversion data 12.36.6 Deleting the conversion data The machine data (destination files) previously created during the conversion can be deleted with the help of the softkey ”Delete”. The selection of the objects to be deleted (inch / metric) is made with the data selector. 12.36.7 Error ha[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.36.7 Error handling The entry XXX in the log file is the name of the target file i.e. the name of the destination data block. Check of the last line for errors 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion The user can control the conversion via the ASCII lists. There is a central configuration file (CONFIG) and a co[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion Structure, syntax and the meaning of key words in the file CONFIG 1) as follows: Syntax: Parameter=value [//Comment] 2) Parameter Value (entry example) Max. number Meaning DESCRIPTION ”Long text name” 76 Full name of switchover function 3) . This text appears in the MMC [...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.36.8 Configurability of the conversion Parameter Value (entry example) Max. number Meaning VALUES X:2, Y:5 One assign- ment per mode Assignment of the reference date values. The reference date value must be defined for each mode by which this mode should be recognized. Only decimal values are allowed. For bits on[...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions This file describes the conversion. The syntax used and described as follows has been kept in terms as general as possible to also allow other conversions, i.e. it is the responsibility of the user to change the file in such a way that the most different conv[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 09.01 12.36.9 List of descriptions Example of a list of descriptions file LIST: // Conversion of 03.99 // first TEA1 n 5002.4-7 I=0b1101 M=0b0100 3969.0 I=1 M=0 1 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 3 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 6 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 7 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 9 I=M · 0.3937+0.01 10 M=I · 2.94 – 0.01 // now the axis-specific machine [...]

01.99 12 Functional Descriptions 12.36.9 List of descriptions b) Example of a special treatment in the case of axis-specific machine data: // Conversion // // Special treatment of one axis (e.g. 2nd axis) TEA1 n // !!!TRICK 17!!! 2800 I=M · 0.3937 2801 M=I · 10 2802 I=M · 0.3937 // End of file Section ”TEA1 n” (marked as TRICK) in example b)[...]

12 Functional Descriptions 01.99 12.36.9 List of descriptions • Power failure during conversion After restarting conversion is continued without conversion errors or alarm messages from the point where the interruption occurred. • Locking during switch-over Before initiating the conversion ensure that the control is in the reset mode and remain[...]

 Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197– j AA50 13–1 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) 13 Index Section A Absolute encoder 12.1 1 ENDA T 12.1 1.2 SIPOS 12.1 1.1 Actual value system, for workpiece 12.23 Alarm processing 12.15.3 Axis Axis traversing 10.4.3 C axis operation 12.7.2.4 Drift compensation 10.4.2 Drive optimization 10.4.1 Drive service displ[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–2 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section Control loop Current control loop 9.2.1 Position control loop 9.2.5 Speed control loop 9.2.3 Coordinate transformation 12.6 Interface signals, NC-PLC 12.6.6 Operation 12.6.7 Programming 12.6.7 T ransformation data set 12.6.3 T ransformation para[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–3 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section E Encoders Absolute encoders 12.1 1 ENDA T 12.1 1.2 SIPOS 12.1 1.1 ENDA T 12.1 1.2 ESR 12.20 DC link overvoltage limitation 12.20.4.2 DC link undervoltage monitoring 12.20.4.4 Mains buf fering 12.20.4.3 Mains failure detection 12.20.4.1 Retracti[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–4 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section I IKA data 5.6 In-process measurement, extension 12.29 General hardware conditions 12.29.2 Indexing function from the PLC 12.13 Installation Axis 10.4 Distance-coded reference marks 10.4.5 Drift compensation 10.4.2 Drive optimization 10.4.1 Refe[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–5 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section Parameter set switchover 6.9 PLC machine data 8 PLC MD for function blocks 8.3 PLC MD for the operating system 8.2 PLC MD for the user 8.4 PLC machine data bits PLC MD bits for function blocks 8.6 PLC MD bits for the operating system 8.5 PLC MD [...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–6 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section P Parameter set switchover 12.27 Axes 12.27.1 Compatibility 12.27.7 Diagnosis 12.27.4 Drive 12.27.1 Operation 12.27.5 Position control 12.27.2 Ratio 12.27.2 Restart 12.27.6 Spindles 12.27.1 Switch off 12.27.6 Switch on 12.27.6 Switchover 12.27.3[...]

09.95  Siemens AG 2001 All Rights Reserved 6FC5197 – j AA50 13–7 SINUMERIK 840C (IA) Page Section SIPOS 12.1 1.1 Software cam 12.22 Speed setpoint matching 10.4.1.2 Spindle Drive service displays 4.3 Leadscrew error compensation (LEC) 12.1 Parameter set switchover 12.27.1 Position-controlled 12.9 Spindle converter 12.17.3 Start-up 10.5 Synch[...]

From: Name Company/Dept. Address Telephone / Suggestions and/or corrections Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improve- ment are also welcome. Installation Guide Order No.: 6FC5197-6AA50-0BP2 Edition: 09.2001 Suggestions Corrections For Publication / Manual: SINU[...]

User Document ation SINUMER IK 840C SINUMER IK Overview of SINUMERIK 840C Documentati on / OEM V er sion f or Windows Brochure C atalog NC 36 Accessories Catalo g NC Z SINUMER IK SINUMER IK SINUMER IK 840C SINUMER IK General Document ation Manufact urer Document ation SINUMER IK ACR 20/ 805SM/840C User/ Manufac turer/ Servi ce Doc umentation Link t[...]